NSRP Project GS E&C

Doc No. : VG215Z-006-A-800

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Serial No. : 6.16

Item : Truck - 5t Cargo

Model : KC3C1
 PRIMA Medium - Duty truck
Owner's Manual

OM MCPE 151101
 Remarks
This manual provides information related to safety using the following signs: WARNING, CAUTION and
NOTE. Please make sure to read the information and comply with the instructions.
This sign is a warning for safety that notifies the customer of property damage or other potential
threat, such damage or malfunction of the vehicle. It is important to follow the instruction.

WARNING This sign indicates potentially threatening situations and if the given instructions are not
followed, serious injuries or death may result.

CAUTION This sign indicates potentially threatening situations, and if the given instructions are not
followed, some or considerable damage to your vehicle or others’ properties may result.
NOTE This symbol indicates useful information for vehicle maintenance and instructions.
 This manual uses a * symbol for optional items that are not included in all vehicles.
Please understand that all information, figures and specifications in this manual may change without prior notice.
 As for vehicles that have already been out of factory, any changed information will not be notified to the
customer or additionally implemented to the manual.
 The specifications and exterior of the vehicle contained in this manual are subject to change without notice.
Instructions in this manual are based on electronic engines. Therefore, for the B5.9 engine, which is a
mechanical type, refer to the corresponding specifications.
Only genuine parts and accessories can be serviced, repaired and inspected.
 We cannot guarantee safety and conformity of any parts and accessories other than the genuine ones, and
Daewoo does not hold any responsibility for any damage resulted from such part or accessory.
 Before driving the vehicle, please make sure to fully understand the information in Chapter 2, “Seats and
Passenger Protection System” in this manual.
 Foreword
Thank you for purchasing a TATA DAEWOO’s mid-duty truck.
This manual provides information and instructions on handling, checkup before driving,
daily checkup and maintenance of the vehicle to make sure that your vehicle is under
optimal conditions and performs well.

Forward
Not only those who use the vehicle for the first time, but also those who are familiar
with it must make sure to have a full understanding of the content provided in this
manual so as to ensure safe and economic driving.
If you have any questions in the use of the vehicle or require repair due to malfunction, please
contact one of DAEWOO’s branch auto shops or auto repair shops designated by DAEWOO,
and refer to the warranty certificate about the guarantee of the quality and service.
Warning About Vehicle Modification And Changes
Do not modify your vehicle.
If the vehicle has been modified from the condition it was first shipped out to you, you will not be able to receive
guaranteed repair not only for the modified parts, but also for the problems caused by the modified parts even if
the vehicle is still under warranty.

The vehicle you purchased has many complex parts, which have undergone various research and test and are organically con-
nected and work together. Modification or replacement of any one of them without permission may result in the performance
deterioration of said part or overload, resulting in vehicle malfunction, and furthermore, serious personal injuries.

Do not perform tuning of the driving system including the engine without permission in order to increase vehicle performance or improvement of its appearance.
▶ If you perform a tuning of the engine or exhaust system…
Any act of adjusting the setting parameters or exchanging or adding nonstandard parts of the fuel supply system, intake and
exhaust systems or electrical system to increase power or adjust exhaust sound is against the local law and may cause serious
durability problems in the vehicle.
Particularly, it will waive the warranty of your vehicle, not only its engine system, but also the transmission and all-wheel
alignment.

▶ If you modify the brake system…

Installing a system similar to the ABS system on a vehicle with no ABS system without permission may result in loss or de-
crease of the braking power, which is the basis for safe driving.
Also installing wheel dust covers for improvement of the appearance of the wheels may prevent smooth release of the friction-
induced heat during braking, which causes fading, resulting in increase of braking distance due to decrease in the braking effect.

Abstain from modifying the stereo system or installing a wireless communication system, rear view camera, LCD TV, remote starter or other non-approved electric systems.

This vehicle consists of electrical wires and fuses for installing standard electrical devices. Installing additional electrical de-
vices would require connecting various electrical wires to the existing harnesses, which may result in overload, exceeding the
rated capacity, damage of the electrical devices and the risk of fire.
Also installing an antenna would require drilling, which may result in rusting.
 Do not install tires, wheels or other parts that are nonstandard.

Installing nonstandard tires of which width or diameter is larger than the standard may cause the contact of the parts close to
the tires during turning or driving on an unpaved road, which will result in faulty driving performance due to wear or damage of
the powertrain, excessive fuel consumption, increase of the braking distance, vehicle vibration, or heavy steering wheel.
Also it will affect the speedometer and hour meter, causing it to indicate an inaccurate driving speed or exaggerate the actual
driving distance. Especially for vehicles with automatic transmissions, shifting shock may occur.

Do not use copied keys.

Vehicle modification and changes

The use of non-approved copied keys may result in malfunction of the key switch, which causes the starting motor unable to
return, making the motor continue to run. It will also cause damage of related electrical wirings and overload, resulting in fire.

Do not install a nonstandard sunroof or color glass.

Cutting the roof of the vehicle to install a sunroof without permission would result in rusting and leakage of cut sections. Also
installing color glass for improvement of the appearance of the vehicle or blocking UV rays may cause leakage and other prob-
lems.

Do not install nonstandard bumper guards.

Installing nonstandard bumper guards or other guard bars without approval would causes increase of the total length of the ve-
hicle, making parking or stopping of the vehicle difficult. It would also cause excessive fuel consumption due to increase in the
overall weight of the vehicle, rusting due to installation drillings and possibly more serious damages in crash accidents due to
lack of shock absorber in the bumper guards.
Do not modify the chassis leaf spring.

Modifying the chassis leaf spring will result in reduction of driving comfort, spring durability and steering performance.
 Do not modify or exchange the interior floor of the vehicle or installed seats without permission.

▶ Installing additional pad on the floor…

Some customers install linoleum material on the interior floor of the vehicle by removing the seats for improved driving com-
fort or easy cleaning. However, it will not only damage various electronic system control units and electrical wiring, but also
prevent the seat rails from moving back and forth, and furthermore, cause faulty performance of the locking device that fixes
the seat in position. In this case, the seat may move to the front or to the back while driving on uphill or downhill roads, which
results in loss of vehicle handling and unexpected accidents.

▶ Exchanging the existing seats to others with difference functionality or installing new seat covers…
Even with the same vehicle type, different types of seats may be installed on the vehicles depending on their own functional-
ity. To perform such functionality, various electrical wirings are installed in the vehicle. Installing a new seat or replacing the
existing one would require getting wirings from the adjacent harness as there are no dedicated wirings or the types are dif-
ferent. Such duplicated or modified use of wirings may cause load over the rated capacity, leading to damage to the electrical
devices and the risk of fire. Also replacing seat covers may cause an open or short circuit to the wiring, resulting in damage of
the electrical devices, poor ventilation, risk of fire and abnormal noise.

Do not install additional accessories or supplementary devices on the vehicle controls.

Lengthening the shift rod or installing a nonstandard accelerator pedal or brake pedal pad would cause operating mistakes
due to change of the vehicle operation force.
Do not attach functional products like stickers, molding or other air dams, or windproof guards.

Adhesives from stickers can damage the paint surface of the vehicle. Also, drilling onto the vehicle body for installation of
molding or other functional devices can cause rust around the corresponding parts as well as noise during driving. Particu-
larly, if the connection is not secured, the parts may fall off while driving, causing vehicle damage injuries or even death.

When using the car stereo system, make sure to use legally purchased CDs as use of illegally copied or downloaded CDs
is against the law and may cause malfunction of the stereo head unit.

Please understand that, in addition to the cases mentioned above, modification of vehicle parts or installation of nonstandard
parts will result in waiving the guaranteed repair of said parts but also other related parts.
 Contents

Chapter 1. For Safe Driving

Chapter 2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

Chapter 3. Doors and Locks

Chapter 4. Inside and Outside Control System

Chapter 5. Instrument cluster

Chapter 6. Switches

Contents
Chapter 7. Transmission and Braking System

Chapter 8. Heater and A/C

Chapter 9. Interior & exterior convenience system

Chapter 10. Emergency Measures

Chapter 11. Inspection and Maintenance

Chapter 12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance

Chapter 13. Handing Vehicle Systems

Chapter 14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

Warranty Repair and Service Information

1. For Safe Driving
Chapter 1

Checking points before starting engine...... 1-2 Chapter 2

Starting and Stopping Engine...................... 1-9 Chapter 3

Chapter 4
Checking before driving............................. 1-13
Chapter 5
Check before driving................................... 1-20
Chapter 6
Safety issues while driving........................ 1-23
Chapter 7

Safe Parking and Stopping......................... 1-33 Chapter 8

Dangerous Situations When Using Chapter 9

the Vehicle................................................... 1-35 Chapter 10

Chapter 11
Preventing risky conditions...................... 1-43
Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Checking points before starting engine
Inside engine and front checking panel
DL06K (Doosan) F4AE3681 (IVECO) B5.9 (Cummins
engine engine engine)

① Engine oil level (Check after tilting the cab.)
② Clutch fluid level ③ Washer fluid level
NOTE
The engine oil level should be located between the MAX and MIN limits of
the engine oil dipstick. If the level is below the MIN limit, add more engine oil.
CAUTION
Filling up the engine oil tank over the maximum limit affects the engine
performance negatively, causing excessive sedimentation of carbon
deposits inside the combustion chamber and engine damage.
WARNING
When checking engine oil right after driving, oil and other engine parts
may be hot. Be cautious of burning.
① Engine oil level
- To check the engine oil level, raise the cab. (Check the level
after tilting the cab.)
• DL06K (Doosan) engine:
Pull out the engine oil dipstick from between the ECU and oil filter on
the right side of the engine (passenger side) to check if the oil level is
within the specified range.
• F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine:
Pull out the engine oil dipstick from the top of the ECU on the left
side of the engine (driver side) to check if the oil level is within the
specified range.
• B5.9 (Cummins) engine:
Pull out the engine oil dipstick from between the injection pump and
fuel filter on the left side of the engine (driver side) to check if the oil
level is within the specified range.
- If the engine oil level is too low, add the same type of engine oil based on the
“Recommended Engine Oil.” Then, after waiting for some minutes, check
the level again as well as its purity and viscosity. Finally, check for leakage.
- Checking engine oil should be performed on flat level ground and at least
30 minutes after the engine is stopped.

1-2
 MAX
MIN
② Clutch fluid level
- Check the level and contamination level of the clutch fluid tank.
- If the level is low, add more fluid up to the indicated level.
- Check for any leaks on the clutch fluid tank.
NOTE
Check the amount and contamination level of the fluid regularly. Also, at
the fluid change interval, use any of DAEWOO’s service network.
CAUTION
If the fluid makes contact with the painted surface, the paint may be peeled
off. Make sure to wipe any spilled fluid on the painted surface.
WARNING
If the cap is not completely closed while there is too much fluid in the tank,
the fluid may overflow, damaging the painted surface or causing a fire.
1. For Safe Driving
③ Washer fluid level
- Open the washer fluid tank cap and check the washer fluid level
on a regular basis. If low, add the genuine DAEWOO washer
fluid.
- Add washer fluid up to the indicated level.
CAUTION
- Use of poor quality washer fluid or water causes the fluid frozen
in winter, damaging the washer fluid tank and washer motor.
- Use of engine coolant instead of washer fluid may damage washer
related devices and painted surface.
- Adding washer fluid over the “MAX” level may result in overflow
through the overflow hose at the bottom of the vehicle and pol-
luting the environment.
1-3
Checking vehicle exterior

● Checking tire ● Checking tire

● Checking chassis spring Check the tires for proper inflation pressure, damage and wear
● Draining compressed air storage tank regularly to ensure driving safety.
● Checking battery When replacing tires, make sure to use the ones that satisfy the
● Checking power steering oil standard.
● Checking coolant
CAUTION
Use of nonstandard tires causes heavier of the steering wheel, excessive
fuel consumption, and malfunction of the brake system. The steering
wheel vibration at a high speed can be also caused, leading to one-sided
wear on the tires.

1-4
 70R19.5
2 65 / Tire specification

1. For Safe Driving

WARNING ● Checking chassis spring
Defects caused by the installation of tires out of the specifications will not be cov-
Check each pin for crank and fracture as well as each U-bolt for
ered by DAEWOO. Make sure to use tires with the correct specifications only. their tightening condition.

WARNING
For a new vehicle or after replacing a tire, make sure to retighten the wheel
nuts to the specified tightening torque after initial 50 to 100 km and 1,000 km
of driving. Then, tighten them at every 4,000 km. Otherwise, tires can be de-
tached, resulting in a serious injury or property damage. Particularly, vehicles
attached with additional axles (pusher and tag) without permission need to
be checked with the wheel nut tightening condition before and after driving.

CAUTION
Excessive tightening damages the wheel pins. Follow the specified tighten-
ing torque:
※ Specified wheel nut tightening torque - Front wheel/rear wheel (8 stud type):
M22 (55 - 65 kg·m)

1-5
● Draining compressed air storage tank ● Checking battery (semi-permanent MF battery)
Water produced within in the air storage tank should be drained - The maintenance-free (MF) batteries require no regular main-
regularly by pulling forward the drain cock underneath the tank. tenance if used normally.
- Check the charging condition via the charging indicator.
NOTE
Charging
When opening the drain cock, make sure to pull it forward, as shown in Charging status Required action
indicator
the picture, not downward.
Green Normal Use
Black Battery charge low Charge the battery
CAUTION
Transparent Shortage of fluid Replace the battery
Moist in the air storage tank may cause serious defects in the brake
system. CAUTION
If the charging warning lamp is turned on while driving, it indicates that
the battery is not being charged properly. Make sure to contact one of
DAEWOO’s service network as soon as possible.

1-6
 MAX
MIN

1. For Safe Driving

-  If any terminal is corroded, disconnect the cable and wipe
it clean before applying greasing on it.
● Checking power steering oil
- Check the oil. If the level is too low, add more oil so that the
level lies between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines in the power
steering oil tank.
- Check for any leakage on each pipe joint.

CAUTION

Use the genuine oil and make sure not to mix it with another oil.

CAUTION
Be cautious not to have moist enter the tank when checking, adding
or changing oil. If water is mixed into oil, it will be degraded, disabling
the steering system.

1-7

MAX
MIN
● Checking coolant
The level of the coolant should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines in the coolant reservoir tank.
If the level goes below the “MIN” line, check for any leakage
on the radiator and other cooling systems. If necessary,
repair the leak and add more coolant up to the “MAX” line.
WARNING
Opening the coolant reservoir tank cap suddenly while the engine is
still hot may cause steam or hot water to spurt out, resulting in scalding.
1-8
CAUTION
Adding cold water while the coolant is hot may cause negative effect on the
cylinder block or head. Add water after waiting for the coolant to cool off.
CAUTION
When adding coolant, always use mixture of water and antifreeze. If you
continue to add only water or antifreeze, the engine parts can be damaged
due to rust. It can also cause the engine to freeze and burst in winter and
overheat in summer.
CAUTION
Check the coolant level if the needle on the temperature gauge on the
instrument cluster goes up abnormally while driving.
CAUTION
Antifreeze may damage painted surface if it makes contact with it.
Therefore, be cautious not to have it contact the surface. If it did, wipe
out immediately using water.
CAUTION
If coolant makes contact with you skin, it will irritate the skin, causing skin
diseases. Wipe it out from the skin using soap and water or hand cleaner.
WARNING
If drunk, children may suffer from serious injuries or lose his or her life.
Make sure to keep coolant away from children.
 Starting and Stopping Engine
Engine starting

1 3 5

R 2 4 6

1. For Safe Driving

- Place the gear shift lever to Neutral and apply the parking
brake.
- Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
- Depress the clutch pedal and brake pedal simultaneously.
- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
NOTE
· The engine will start only when the shift lever is in the Neutral
position.
· After the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the clutch pedal
may become hard to be depressed due to insufficient air pressure in the
air tank. In this case, depress the brake pedal only to start the engine.

CAUTION
Turning the ignition key to the “ON” position causes various ECUs to
perform the system checkup for about five seconds. Therefore, do not
start the engine immediately, but wait for five seconds.

1-9
 Accessory (ACC) CAUTION
ON · Idling for a long time reduces the service life of the engine, consumes
unnecessary fuel, and produces a large amount of air pollutants. There-
fore, avoid unnecessary engine idling.
LOCK
· E
 xcessive running of the engine while the normal engine operating
START temperature has not yet been reached will cause a serious damage to
the engine and use up excessive fuel.

WARNING
Do not stay in a parking lot or indoors with poor ventilation for an extended
period of time while the engine is running. You will be poisoned by exhaust
gas, leading to serious injuries or even death.

- Turn the key to the “START” position. NOTE

CAUTION If you have tried to start the engine when there is no fuel in the fuel tank,
the fuel supply system needs to be bled. If not, the engine will not start
· D
 o not turn the ignition key to the “START” position for more than 10 even if there is fuel in the fuel tank.
seconds. It will damage the start motor or battery.
· If the engine won't start and you need to try it again, place the key to the
“ACC” position for approx. 30 seconds before turning it to the “START” CAUTION
position again. (The key switch has the restart prevention function, which
makes continuous restarting impossible.) When the engine is cold, the engine idling speed may go up to about 800
to 900 RPM, and white smoke is controlled by the ECM. Therefore, do not
· M
 ake sure to start the engine while the shift lever is placed in the Neutral
position and the parking brake is applied. attempt to adjust the idling speed. (approx. 20 to 40 seconds)
· T
 he idling engine RPM is determined by the ECM based on the ambi-
ent temperature, oil temperature and coolant temperature. Therefore,
it doesn't need to be adjusted by the driver (only for vehicles with
electronic engines).

1 - 10
Starting Engine (Automatic transmission vehicle*)

1. For Safe Driving

< ZF - Automatic
Transmission > < Allison Automatic
Transmission >
● Manual start using the key
WARNING
- Pull the parking brake lever.
To start a vehicle with a automatic transmission, make sure to start the
- With the accelerator pedal released the brake pedal engine while depressing the brake pedal. Before driving, move the shift
depressed, turn the key to the “START” position to start the button to the “D” or “R” position while depressing the brake pedal.
engine. If the engine won't start, turn the key back to the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position for about 30 seconds, and then try NOTE
to start the engine again. The engine in all vehicles will start only when the shift lever is in the
(The ignition switch has the restart prevention function, which neutral position.

makes continuous restarting impossible.)

- Confirm that the shift button is in the “N” position.

1 - 11
How to start engine in winter Stopping Engine

Accessory (ACC)
ON

LOCK
START

- When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the air and After driving with a large amount of load or driving on a steep road,
fuel will be preheated based on the ambient temperature. Once make sure to let the engine idling for one to two minutes before
the preheat process completes, the preheat indicator ( ) stopping the engine. If stopping the engine instantly, coolant may flow
and fuel preheat indicator ( ) will be turned off. over.
(Only for vehicles with electronic engines)
-  Once the preheat process completes, depress the clutch pedal CAUTION
and start the engine.
- Since the engine ECM will automatically operate the system, The diesel engine tends to continue the rotation after the switch is turned
there is no need for driver intervention. off. In this case, turn the ignition key back to the “ON” position and then
- Once the engine temperature reaches to the operating level, to the “OFF” position. Otherwise, the alternator circuit may be damaged.
avoid unnecessary engine idling.
CAUTION
Sudden acceleration during warming-up driving will reduce the service
life of the engine.

1 - 12
 Checking before driving
Getting on and off the vehicle
CAUTION
Check to see if various lamps, signals, and warning lamps are working
correctly. Such preventive measures will help you avoid damage or injuries
due to vehicle accidents.

Before driving

WARNING
Safety Label
Remove objects placed on the dashboard or on the floor. These objects

1. For Safe Driving

may block the driver’s sight. Objects placed on the dashboard or floor
may harm passengers when the vehicle makes a sudden stop or collides
with other vehicles or objects. Objects placed on the dashboard or floor
may become stuck under the brake pedal.

CAUTION
WARNING
· When getting on or off the vehicle, make sure to face the cab.
· Place any belongings, such as document or clothing, into the vehicle Make sure, before driving, that all passengers wear the seat belt.
before you get on the vehicle. (Put heavy or fragile objects like glass
cups or cellphones into the glove box before starting off.)
· Clean your hands and feet when getting on and off the vehicle.
· Make sure to place both hands and one foot or one hand and two feet
on the door handle or step when getting on and off the vehicle.
· Keep the door handle and step clean. (Keep grease, oil, or mud from
the door handle and step.)
·  Take extra care when getting on and off the vehicle while snowing,
raining, or under thick fog.
· Do not jump or play around when getting on or off the vehicle.

1 - 13
Checking steering wheel play
Turn the steering wheel gently to the left and right to check its
play. The steering wheel play should be approx. 30 to 50 mm with
the front wheels in the straight ahead position.
1 - 14
CAUTION
· S
 top the vehicle, and while the engine is running and the front wheels
are in the straight head position, verify the steering wheel play.
(Normal: 30 - 50 mm)
· If keeping the steering wheel turned to one end with the engine running
for over 10 seconds, the power steering pump can be seized. Avoid
excessive operation of the steering wheel.
(In this case, the pump will generate humming sounds.)
· Do not operate the ignition key while driving. It may cause the engine
to be turned off and disable the power steering function, leading to
accidents.
· Check for any loose or damaged joint of the steering linkage and add
grease to each joint. (However, the ball joint parts do not need grease.)
If defects are found, make sure to repair them before driving again.
 hen repairing the vehicle, do not step on the power steering hydraulic
· W
hose and pipe. This will deform the hydraulic hose and pipe, causing
power steering oil leaking and serious injuries.
· Perform sufficient bleeding after servicing the power steering system.
· The angle and height of the steering wheel can be adjusted for about
seven seconds after pressing the steering wheel adjustment switch
(on the left side of the dashboard). (After these seven seconds, the
steering wheel cannot be adjusted. Since the steering wheel is not
fixed during the adjustment, do not use the switch while driving.)
· If the vehicle air pressure is below 6 bar, the angle and height adjust-
ment of the steering wheel may not work as smoothly as intended.
Checking parking brake Checking wiper operation

1. For Safe Driving

● Checking wipers
Before driving, confirm that the operation of the parking brake
lever works satisfactorily. Check the condition of the wipers regularly. If any wear or
The driving position is when the parking brake lever faces cracks are found on the wiper or the wiper cannot clean the
upward. windshield properly under a normal condition, replace the
wiper blades.

CAUTION
Oil or wax on the wiper blades will cause abnormal operating noise or
poor cleaning performance.

CAUTION
Damaged wiper blades may chip the glass surface.

1 - 15
 Checking instrument cluster lamps and indicators
Type A

Wiper arm

Fixing lever
Wiper blade

Type B

● Replacing the wiper blade

Replace it for a new one in the following order:
- While pressing the fixing clip of the wiper blade, pull out the
blade from the wiper arm.
-  While pressing the fixing clip, insert the new wiper blade
into the wiper arm.

CAUTION

If you activate the wipers without washer fluid when it's not raining, the
wiper blades or windshield surface can be damaged due to dirt or sand Check the operating condition of the instrument cluster's lamps,
on the glass. indicators and warning lamps while the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.

1 - 16
Checking clutch pedal Checking brake pedal

1. For Safe Driving

15 mm

Push the clutch pedal gently with a hand to check the play The proper brake pedal play is 15 mm.
between the push load of the master cylinder and the piston. The pedal play can be adjusted with the adjusting bolt on the left
When the pedal play is approx. 3 mm in this condition, it is side of the pedal. Make sure to check the contact condition of the
normal. brake warning lamp switch.

1 - 17
Checking door lock state Adjusting angle of side mirrors, under mirrors
and approach rear view mirrors

Check the door locks.

Adjust the angle of the exterior side mirrors, under mirrors and
approach rear view mirrors to secure the rear view and front view of
the driver.
WARNING
Do not drive with the exterior side mirrors, under mirrors, and approach
rear view mirrors folded. This will prevent you from acquiring a sufficient
driving sight and may cause unexpected accidents.

Convex mirrors are used for exterior side mirrors, under mirrors and
approach rear view mirrors to help driver acquire a wider view, and
the warning sign indicating “objects are closer than you see them
on the mirror” is on the lower section of the exterior side mirrors.

1 - 18
 WARNING

Since the exterior side mirrors, under mirrors, and approach rear view
mirrors use convex mirrors, the driver may determine the distance be-
tween the vehicle and the object behind or under the vehicle incorrectly,
causing accidents. Make sure to take utmost care.

WARNING

Adjust the exterior side mirrors, under mirrors, and approach rear view
mirrors appropriately before driving, not while driving. Adjusting these

1. For Safe Driving

mirrors while driving may result in accidents.

CAUTION
When the exterior side mirrors, under mirrors, and approach rear view
mirrors are not working correctly due to freezing or foreign material, do
not force them as it may result in malfunction. Melt the ice or remove
the foreign material in advance.

WARNING
Do not continue driving with defective or damaged exterior side mirrors,
under mirrors, or approach rear view mirrors. Your driving sight will not
be secured, causing accidents.

1 - 19
Check before driving
Check before driving
-  Check if the value indicated on the air pressure gauge is 8.3 -
8.7 kg/cm2. If the value is out of this range, rev up the engine
to set the pressure within the specified range.
-  Release the parking brake to turn off the parking brake
indicator.
-  K eep the engine idling sufficiently so that its temperature
reaches the normal operating level. Then, place the shift lever
in the 1st gear position and start off.
1 - 20
Angle adjustment
13° - 15°
mm
93
Steering Wheel Adjustment Switch
Adjust the angle and height of the steering wheel for comfortable
driving.
Push the steering wheel adjustment switch (on the left of the
dashboard), and adjust the angle by moving the steering wheel
front and back, and left and right. Once the angle adjustment
completes, check to see if the steering wheel is accurately fixed.
NOTE
Longitudinal adjustment angle: 13º - 15º; vertical adjustment height:
93 mm
CAUTION
The steering wheel angle must always be adjusted when the vehicle is
at a full stop. Accidents may occur if you attempt to operate the steering
wheel adjustment switch to adjust the steering wheel angle while driving.
 Economic driving

1. For Safe Driving

CAUTION For economic driving, please use the following recommendations:

· Half-clutching will reduce the service life of the clutch.

· Do not drive while the amount of coolant, engine oil, or power steering
oil is below the specification.
· Confirm the safety on the front, back, left and right of the vehicle and
start off slowly.
· Avoid sudden acceleration as it can apply stress on various parts of
the vehicle.
- Perform maintenance work before starting the engine by
referring to the checking items and regular maintenance
schedule table.
- Avoid idling, sudden acceleration and sudden stop as much
as possible.

- Always use the first gear (the lowest gear) when starting off
on a level or uphill road. (Starting the vehicle with a higher
gear will reduce the service life of the clutch.)
- When shifting, engage the gear by depressing the clutch
pedal all the way down.

1 - 21

- When shifting for acceleration, do not increase the engine
RPM of up to the maximum level.
- Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
- Reduce the speed when driving on a bumpy road.
- Always maintain the specified tire inflation pressure.
- Do not load unnecessary cargo.
1 - 22
Safety rules for driving
The driver is responsible for the safety of himself or herself as well
as any passenger in the vehicle and pedestrians on the street.
Therefore, the driver should take utmost care and effort for safe
driving. Most car crashes are caused by the driver’s carelessness.
A key factor that prevents safe driving these days is to use a
cellphone while driving. According to a study, the risk of accidents
increases when using a cellphone while driving, compared to the
driving without using a cellphone.
Another research data reported recently shows that the risk of
accidents increases fourfold when using a cellphone while
driving. Furthermore, using cellphones while driving is considered
to be more dangerous than drinking and driving.
It is against the law to use a cellphone while driving.
Use of cellphones, audio equipment, TV or a navigation system
increases the risk of accidents. DAEWOO will restrict the use of
such devices while driving.
WARNING
Safe driving is performed not only by the driver’s caution, but also by
the driver’s common sense and appropriate decision making. When
driving, make sure to minimize or avoid the following factors that may
prevent safe driving:
 Safety issues while driving
While driving
- To use a cellphone
- To adjust the steering wheel angle, rear view mirror or seat
- To use other electronic devices
- To read a map or other documents or books
- To wear or take off the seat belt
- To change the lane suddenly while approaching a tollgate
- To divert the attention to other things while driving
- To eat or drink while driving

1. For Safe Driving

WARNING
Such actions will increase the risk of car crashes and may cause property
loss, serious injuries or even death.

Whenever possible, prevent accidents by conducting the above
actions before driving or after stopping the vehicle on a safe
place.
- Avoid excessive running of the engine during the break-in
period of the vehicle.
- If you hear abnormal sound from the engine or detect
strange smell, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and
check the vehicle.

1 - 23
 Type A

Type B

- While driving, all warning lamps on the instrument cluster

should be turned off.
If any red warning lamp is illuminated or warning buzzer
sounds, stop the vehicle immediately and check for the
cause.

NOTE
When you cannot find the cause for malfunction, have your vehicle
serviced at a nearby DAEWOO repair shop.

- If the air pressure goes below 5.3 kg/cm2, the corresponding

warning lamp will be turned on and warning signal will sound.
Then, stop the vehicle immediately and check for the air
pressure.

1 - 24
 1. For Safe Driving
- Avoid sudden acceleration or stop as it may stress the
- While driving, it is normal that the needle on the temperature
vehicle.
gauge is below “H.” If it is at “H” , stop the vehicle immediately,
- Do not place your foot on the clutch pedal when you are not
decrease the engine RPM and check the coolant.
using the clutch. If excessive play is occurred, adjust it
WARNING immediately.

Do not open the coolant reservoir cap suddenly to check the coolant. CAUTION
Hot steam may spurt, burning you. Wait until the engine temperature
· The driver’s habit can affect the service life of the clutch.
is lowered sufficiently and cover the cap with a cloth to open it gently.
· Do not place your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. Such action will
depress the clutch pedal only halfway, resulting in wear on the clutch disc.
· D o not depress the clutch pedal halfway to maintain the speed on a
downhill road.
· D o not depress the clutch pedal halfway to adjust the speed while
turning and cornering. (Instead, Use the appropriate gear and brake
pedal to adjust the speed.)
· Do not use the clutch to reduce the speed of the vehicle for downshifting.

1 - 25
 CAUTION
1 3 5 · Apply the parking brake when stopping or parking the vehicle on an
uphill or downhill road to ensure safety. To start off the vehicle under this
N
condition, release the clutch pedal completely with the 1st gear selected
R 2 4 6 and the accelerator pedal depressed. When the vehicle is about to move,
release the parking brake lever and start off. (Make sure to return the
parking brake lever to the original position.)
· At a low temperature in winter, you may find it difficult to shift the gear
until the transmission fluid is warmed up. This is normal and does not
indicate mechanical malfunction.
· If you find it difficult to move the shift lever to the 1st gear or reverse
driving position with the vehicle stationary, place the shift lever to the
neutral position, release and depress back the clutch pedal, and try
moving the shift lever to the 1st gear or reverse driving position.
- Shift the gear based on the engine speed and vehicle speed. · Do not place the hand on the shift lever while driving unless you do so
Before selecting the reverse (R) gear, stop the vehicle to change the gear. (It can wear the parts in the transmission.)
completely.
CAUTION
CAUTION
· When downshifting, be cautious not to let the engine RPM enter the red
Before selecting the reverse gear, depress the clutch pedal and wait zone indicated on the tachometer at the lower gear.
for three seconds.
· Do not attempt to stop the vehicle on an uphill road using the clutch. It
will damage the clutch.
· Make sure to shift the gear at the appropriate shift time for smooth and
cost-effective driving. Make sure that the needle on the tachometer
does not go over the red zone. Otherwise, it will damage the engine
and transmission.

1 - 26
 5
3
1
N Engine
5 6
3 4
1 2
Exhaust Brake
N
6 R
4
Brake
2
R

1. For Safe Driving

- When driving on an uphill road, shift the transmission to a
lower gear, if possible, so that too much force is loaded on
the engine.
- When driving downhill, use the exhaust brake or engine
brake also. Particularly on a long downhill road, using only
the main brake will cause degradation of braking power due
to overheat of the brake drum and lack of the compressed
air, resulting in slower braking in an emergency.

NOTE
Vehicles equipped with mechanical engines do not have an engine brake.

WARNING
Take caution not to exceed the maximum engine RPM. Excessive RPM of
the engine will cause overload on various parts of the engine, particularly
the valve spring and push load.

1 - 27
 WARNING

The engine brake or exhaust brake is an effect of braking resulting from

the engine compression pressure when releasing the accelerator pedal
while driving. It is more effective with the lower gear.

WARNING
When driving on a long downhill road, using the main brake repeatedly
will degrade the braking performance due to overheating of the drum,
resulting in possible accidents. Whenever possible, use the engine brake
or exhaust brake.

WARNING
Applying the engine brake or exhaust brake suddenly on an icy or slip-
pery downhill road will cause the vehicle slip and may result in accidents.

WARNING

When driving at a high speed and wanting to apply the engine brake,
downshift one gear. Downshifting many gears at once can damage the
transmission and engine.

WARNING WARNING
Engine overrun may occur regardless of the road condition (downhill, Damage due to engine overrun will be excluded from the warranty and
level or uphill roads), and shifting the gear rapidly from a higher to a cause expensive repair.
lower one would cause rapid increase of the engine RPM, resulting in
damaging the interior parts of the engine and transmission.

1 - 28
Avoiding unnecessary activities while driving When reversing

1. For Safe Driving

While driving, do not attempt to take out the key from the ignition When reversing, make sure to check to see if there are children
switch. or other obstacles behind the vehicle.

WARNING WARNING

It will lock the steering wheel or cause the power steering to malfunction, Children behind the vehicle will not appear on the side mirrors. Make sure
resulting in accidents. to check the back by getting off the vehicle so as to prevent any accident.

While driving, do not attempt to operate switches by entering the

hand through the steering wheel.

WARNING
Abrupt turning of the steering wheel may cause injuries. Also, it will hinder
steering wheel operation and may cause accidents.

1 - 29
Driving when raining Driving on highway

Rug pattern Rib rug pattern Rib pattern

When driving on a wet road or while raining, take extra care and Make sure to keep the following instructions for safe and pleasant
drive at a lower speed as the tire grip will be reduced. driving on highways:

WARNING Checking before driving on a highway

Highway driving requires special attention compared to driving on
Driving at a high speed while raining will cause hydroplaning, which a normal road. Check the vehicle thoroughly based on the “Daily
makes the tires float on the road surface. Checking before Driving”.

 fter passing on a puddle or after washing the vehicle, slow down

A Tire maintenance
Heat generated on the tires may change based on the driving
and depress the brake pedal gently for several times to make
speed and load weight. However, vehicles with a higher
sure that the brake works normally.
frequency of highway driving should use rib pattern tires.

1 - 30
Highway driving guideline
Make sure to drive always with a calm and collected mind on the
highway.
● Sense of speed
Compared to normal roads, highways have even surface and
offer the driver wider and better sight, which makes the driver 80 km/h
unable to feel the actual speed.
Therefore, always check the speedometer.
● Braking distance 80 m
The performance of the brake is the single most important one in

1. For Safe Driving

high speed driving. When the driver senses any danger and applies
the brake, the response time is at least one second; when the
vehicle is moving at 80 km/h, the vehicle will move for 30 - 50 m.
Therefore, before applying the brake, the vehicle should
maintain longer distance from the other vehicle than it needs
on a normal road.
CAUTION
At high speed driving, the driver should be aware of the following char-
acteristics:
· Acceleration
At high speed driving, driving resistance will exponentially increase,
and therefore, accelerate the vehicle with room for engine power.
· Climbing performance
Have a full understanding of the relation between the slope and
maximum speed at each gear, and adjust the engine RPM accordingly.
· Fuel consumption
Check the fuel level before long distance driving to ensure a comfort-
able and pleasant journey.
● Vehicle distance
The distance to the vehicle ahead is normally the same as the
speed of driving. That is, if the vehicle is being driven at 80 km/h,
the minimum distance to the vehicle ahead should be at least 80 m.
● Passing
When trying to pass a vehicle, your vehicle should be faster than
the one you want to pass by at least 10 km/h. Make sure to check
any car behind you before passing. Turn on the corresponding
turn signal lamp and go over the passing line on the road.
● Turning
A curve on a highway is normally slanted a bit, and a small
turn of the steering wheel will result in a larger turn of the
vehicle. When driving on a wet or icy road, be cautious of
brake operation to avoid tire slip.

1 - 31

● Others
- To enhance the braking performance, use the exhaust brake
or engine brake as well.
-  Sudden operation of the steering wheel while driving will
cause a risk not only on your vehicle but on others.
-  If a tire becomes flat while driving, grab the steering wheel
firmly and reduce the speed using the exhaust brake or
engine brake.
Sudden braking will damage the tire.
WARNING
Losing the steering wheel, braking suddenly or rapid turning of the
steering wheel in panic when the tire becomes flat while driving may
result in accidents.
1 - 32
Parking and Checking after Driving
● Stopping engine and parking
- If the engine seems to be overheated, stop the vehicle and
idle the engine to adjust the temperature. Do not stop the
engine immediately.
- When parking, place the shift lever in the neutral position,
pull the parking brake lever and make sure the lever is fixed.
● Checking after driving
After driving, clean the vehicle and check the followings:
- Take necessary measures on any defects or malfunctions
discovered while driving. If any of them requires
complicated servicing, contact a nearby DAEWOO repair
shop for servicing.
- Check and clean every part of the vehicle and check for
any damage, oil leakage or fluid level.
 Safe Parking and Stopping
Stopping and parking on a safe place Parking downhill

1. For Safe Driving

Do not stop or park the vehicle nearby flammable objects, such
as hay, leaves, paper, cloth, or oil.
WARNING
The emission control system and exhaust pipe are very hot while or after
driving. If there are flammable materials around the vehicle, it can lead
to a fire. Make sure to check the surrounding before stopping or parking.
Pull and fix the parking brake lever, and place the shift lever to
“R” for manual transmission vehicles, or “N” for automatic
transmission vehicles.
NOTE
It will be more effective to chock the wheels and turn the steering wheel
so that the tires are turned as much toward the wall as possible.

Stop or park the vehicle in such a way that exhaust gas does not
reach a fence or wall.

1 - 33
Parking uphill Sleeping briefly in the vehicle
When sleeping briefly in the vehicle to take a rest, stop the
engine.
WARNING
If the engine is running, it is possible that you may move the shift lever
or depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally, resulting in accidents
or causing fire due to engine overheating.

WARNING
If the engine is running and the heater is operated for some minutes, open
the window a bit for ventilation. Using the heater in a closed space will
reduce the amount of oxygen, which may cause respiratory problems,
resulting in injuries or even death.

Pull and fix the parking brake lever, and set the shift lever to the
When leaving the vehicle
first gear position for manual transmission vehicles, or to the “N”
position for automatic transmission vehicles. Stop the engine and take all belongings with you. Do not leave
any children in the vehicle. Lock the door.
NOTE

It will be more effective to chock the wheels and turn the steering wheel
so that the tires are turned as much toward the wall as possible.
Drive vehicle with engine running
WARNING
Attempting to move the vehicle while the engine is turned off will degrade
the braking performance, which may result in accidents.

1 - 34
 Dangerous Situations When Using the Vehicle
Stopping or parking the vehicle in a closed space No obstructing objects in the vehicle allowed

1. For Safe Driving

Do not let the engine run for a long time in a poorly ventilated Do not keep inflammable substances or spray bottles in the
place like a garage. vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
If you stay in a closed place for a long time while the engine is running,
you may become poisoned by exhaust gas, resulting in serious injuries This will cause the risk of fire or explosion.
or even death.

Do not place an object below the driver’s feet or on the floor; do

not put down thick carpet on the floor.

WARNING
This will prevent the driver from using the brake, clutch, and accelerator
pedals, resulting in accidents.

1 - 35
No smoking in the vehicle
Do not place inflammable material in the ashtray.

WARNING
This may cause fire.

Do not keep a disposable lighter in the vehicle.

WARNING
In summer, disposable lighters may become exposed to direct sunlight,
causing explosion and fire.

Make sure to put out cigarettes or matches completely before

putting them in the ashtray.

WARNING
Not being able to put them out may result in fire.

Avoid smoking while driving.

WARNING
Smoking may interrupt driving, causing accidents.

WARNING
If you throw a cigarette butt out the window, it may enter to the cargo
bed due to the air flow, causing fire.

1 - 36
Attaching accessories Extra caution for coolant inspection

MAX
MIN

1. For Safe Driving

Do not attach unnecessary accessories on the windshield, and do Do not open the coolant reservoir tank cap while the engine is
not place large accessories on the rear glass that may block the hot.
driver’s sight.
WARNING
WARNING
Hot spurting steam or water may burn your face or skin.
These accessories may block the driver’s sight to the front and back of
the vehicle, causing unexpected accidents.

WARNING
Some accessories, when exposed to sunlight, may work as a magnifying
glass, which may cause a fire.

1 - 37
Always use genuine parts No modification without permission allowed

Maintain the safe and optimal performance of your vehicle by
always using DAEWOO’s genuine parts.
WARNING
Loss caused by using nonstandard parts will not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not modify electric and electronic devices without permission.
WARNING
Always use standard fuses with specified capacity, and do not change or
modify electrical wirings of the vehicle. They can catch a fire.
WARNING
Do not install a remote starter without permission. If it malfunctions, you
will not be able to start the engine, leading to damage of the exhaust
gas system or engine parts or a fire.

1 - 38
 The air intake system is a closed zone
CAUTION Except the air inlet, the air intake system should consist of a
closed zone. (use genuine parts)
Avoid replacing the glasses to color glasses. Such replacement can
cause leakage and other issues.
WARNING
If the intake system is not closed, the service life of the element and
CAUTION
engine performance will be shortened.
Use the specified tires and wheels only. If using nonstandard tires and
wheels, it can lead to heavier feel of the steering wheel, excessive fuel
consumption, degraded braking performance, steering wheel vibration Frame welding and drilling
at a high speed and uneven tire wear.
CAUTION

1. For Safe Driving

Caution when working in engine compartment Make sure to take the following caution for frame welding and drilling:
and vehicle
Take caution for the high-speed rotation parts of the cooling fan and
- Avoid welding or drilling that is inappropriate for the original
hot parts of the exhaust system.
function of the vehicle.
WARNING - If determined to be necessary for the usage of the shipped
vehicle, drilling should be performed on the side of the frame
The cooling fan rotates at a high speed and may cause injuries.
only, as shown in the following table (yy) and figure (xx).
- The welding line should be within 30 - 50 mm in length and
WARNING should not touch the zone with slashed lines, ¼ H from the
Keep fuel or inflammable substances away from the hot parts of the end of the side area.
exhaust system to prevent a fire.

WARNING
Scalding or burning may occur if your body makes contact with the high
temperature part of the exhaust system and exhaust gas itself.

1 - 39
 Vehicle position
Table yy. Specifications for frame drilling About 20 mm of height difference between the left and right sides
Model a b c of the cab or cargo bed may occur. This is due to the vehicle
Medium duty suspension tolerance, and causes no issue for the vehicle
Below ø20 1/4 H or over 40 or over performance or functionality.
truck
a: hole diameter, b: bending-restricted area, Using cargo bed
c: hole edge distance, h: frame height
- Do not ever add holes on the flange part of the frame. It will
become the direct cause of frame cracks.
- When drilling, do not use gas welding, but use drills only.
- When installing sub-frames, make sure to use bolts on the
chassis frame.

C Do not drive with the cargo bed open.

b
Make sure to verify that the gate of the cargo bed is completely
closed before driving.
a
WARNING
· Overloading is prohibited. Make sure to follow the specified capacity.
· Overloading may damage tires, dull the steering capacity, and degrade
Figure xx. Restricted scope for frame welding and drilling
the brake performance, resulting in accidents.

1 - 40

Securely fixed cargo bed
- Conduct a thorough checkup of the condition of the vehicle
cargo bed and make sure there will be no possibility of freight
fall.
- On a sudden stop, freight may lean forward and enter the cab
due to the characteristics of a truck, causing accidents. Make
particular caution when loading sharp freight or steel plates.
CAUTION
Full-loading or overloading is prohibited.
1. For Safe Driving
The cargo bed is not for passengers.
Do not drive the vehicle with people on the cargo bed.
WARNING
The cargo bed is not equipped with any safety devices, so riding on
the cargo bed may result in a serious and large-scale traffic accident.
1 - 41
When getting on and off the cargo bed Using the rear gate

WARNING
Use only the designated step when getting on and off the cargo bed.
Using other objects other than the step on the vehicle may damage the
vehicle or result in accidents.
When the rear gate of the cargo bed is open flat, make sure to
fasten the gate chain thoroughly.
CAUTION
Do not step on the gate while working. This will damage the chain or
gate, and cause injuries if slipped.

1 - 42

When riding with the elderly, infants or children
- Do not leave infants, children or the elderly in the vehicle
unattended. Infants or children may touch the controls in the
cab, which may result in accidents. Also in summer, they may
be suffocated if the doors and windows are closed as the
indoor temperature rises.
- Make sure that children do not touch the ignition key and other
devices in the cab. This can lead to vehicle damage and
accidents.
Fatigued or drunk driving prohibited
- Long-hour driving is dangerous and should be avoided. Driving
for long hours without taking a rest may cause the driver to fall
asleep at the wheel, causing accidents. Make sure to take a
rest at every two hours for safety.
- Do not drink and drive.
Drinking will prevent the driver from making fast and clear
decisions, and thus, from safe driving. Drinking and driving is
an illegal act that also puts other drivers at risk.
Do not stick out parts of the body outside the
window.
Never stick out parts of the body outside the window while driving or
at a stop. You may be injured by a passing vehicle or objects outside.
Preventing risky conditions
Driving with tailgate or door open is prohibited.
- Do not drive while the tailgate is open. This will cause the exhaust
gas to enter the cab, causing gas poisoning.
- Driving while the tailgate is open will cause objects inside to be
thrown outside, causing accidents.
- Driving while the door is open will cause the passenger to fall
outside the vehicle, causing serious injuries.
- Make sure to drive the vehicle with the doors locked. Passengers
may unintentionally open the door or children may open it by
mistake, which may result in serious accidents.
1. For Safe Driving
Equip a fire extinguisher
Make sure to equip a fire extinguisher in the vehicle in case of fire.
Maintain the fire extinguisher at the optimal condition and have a full
understanding of its usage. Refer to the label on the fire extinguisher
for further information.
Make a habit of regular checkup
Always check the vehicle based on the checkup cycle. If parts are
replaced, record the details and the date of replacement.
1 - 43
MEMO

1 - 44
2. Seats and Passenger Protection System
Chapter 1

Seat belt type A.............................................. 2-2 Chapter 2

Seat belt indicator......................................... 2-3 Chapter 3

Chapter 4
Wearing the seat belt.................................... 2-4
Chapter 5
Front seat adjustment device....................... 2-7
Chapter 6
Vehicle with Bed-Sleeper Cab................... 2-16
Chapter 7

B-Type SEATS AND OCCUPANT Chapter 8

PROTECTION SYSTEMS............................ 2-17
Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Seat belt type A
Supplemental Restraint System
DAEWOO has been making continuous effort in providing
WARNING
passenger safety and have conducted tests and research for a
The domestic traffic laws require that all passengers wear the seat belt
long time to develop safety devices for protecting passengers.
on a highway, and that the driver and the one on the passenger’s seat
This vehicle complies with the domestic safety regulations, and wear the seat belt on a public road.
related devices and parts have passed the safety standard and
have acquired the certification. WARNING
Such a safety standard targets seat belts, seats, safety glass and For an accident that causes injuries or death while not wearing the seat
other devices included in the vehicle. belt, the driver and/or passengers may not receive legal protection.
One of the devices that protect passengers from crashes is the
seat belt installed on the seat. WARNING

The seat belt is the most basic and important safety device, and
only when the driver and passengers wear the seat belts, they
can be protected from more serious situations.
Always wear the safety belt
The seat belt will secure the passengers in case of crashes. Also,
during accidents, it prevents passengers from being tossed from
the vehicle and minimizes the intensity of the impact of the head
or other body parts on the instrument panel or seat located on the
front so as to protect them from serious injuries or death.
During the impact, the impact energy on the vehicle would be
delivered to the passengers if they did not wear the seat belt. It is
as if they ran at the same speed of the vehicle and made impact
onto a concrete wall. But wearing the seat belt will absorb a
considerable amount of impact energy.
Children, pregnant women, those who are injured or the mentally handi-
capped must wear the seat belt as well. If not, serious injuries or death
may occur.
WARNING
How to wear the seat belt and how to operate the seat are well explained
in this manual. Make sure to fully understand all the content provided.
WARNING
The seat belt cannot completely protect passengers from all types of
accidents. But it should be understood that it will reduce the level of the
damage.
WARNING
The seat belt is only for one person and cannot be shared for two people.
If two people share one seat belt, they will not be able to be protected
by the seat belt.

2-2
 Seat belt indicator
Seat belt indicator
WARNING
Installing additional devices on the seat belt will reduce the protection
effect of the seat belt. Do not attach any device on the seat belt.

WARNING
Check the seat belt and other related parts on a regular basis for any

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

damage or functionality. If defected, contact the DAEWOO repair network
immediately to receive service.

CAUTION
The seat belt used in a vehicle that experienced a crash should be re-
placed even if there appears no stretch or damage by bare eye. It may
not work normally.
If the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the seat belt indicator will
be turned on. Once the driver wears the seat belt, the indicator will be
turned off.

NOTE
For the vehicle equipped with the B5.9 engine, the indicator and warning
buzzer will be activated for 30 seconds until warning the seat belt.

CAUTION
If the seat belt indicator continues to be turned on or off, contact DAE-
WOO’s repair network for service.

2-3
Wearing the seat belt
3-point seat belt
Installed on both front side seats are 3-point seat belts.
Wear these seat belts in the following order:
① Adjust the location of the seat at a comfortable position before
wearing the seatbelt.
② Take the hook of the seat belt, pull it over the shoulder and
chest and insert it to the buckle until you hear a clicking
sound. Here, the lower belt should pass the pelvis.
2-4
WARNING
If the upper belt part passes the ribs or the neck area or if the lower belt
passes the abdomen, the impact energy delivered through the belt dur-
ing the impact will result in serious injuries. Make sure that the upper belt
passes the shoulder and the chest, and the lower belt passes the pelvis.
③ Check to see if the hook is securely fit into the buckle by pulling
the hook.
WARNING
Do not ever wear the seat belt loosely. It will reduce the protection effect
of the seat belt.
When releasing the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
Seat belt height adjustment (driver’s seat) Wearing seat belt by pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear the seat belt.

WARNING
If pregnant women do not wear the seat belt, more serious injuries may
occur. They need more care for wearing the seat belt. They should always
wear the 3-point seat belt, and the lower belt should avoid passing the
area where the fetus is and should pass below the pelvis.

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

NOTE
Consult your doctor about whether pregnant women may be able to drive
and what effect wearing the seat belt will have on them and their child.

Adjust the location of the seat for easy steering and pedaling.
The height of the seat belts on the front seats can be adjusted. WARNING
Adjust the seat belt as follows: Adjusting the seat while driving may cause accidents. The seat should
① Wear the seatbelt. always be adjusted before driving.

② While pulling the seat belt adjustment button,

WARNING
③ Adjust the height of the seat belt.
Sudden movement of the seat while driving will cause accidents. Make
sure that the seat is completely secured after adjusting the seat.
WARNING
The seat belt whose height is inaccurately adjusted will reduce the effect
of the seat belt in case of a crash.

2-5
2-point seat belt *

① Plate ① Release
① Plate ② Buckle ② Plate button

Installed on the front center seat is a
2-point seat belt.
Wear it as follows:
1. Adjust the location of the seat at a
comfortable position before wearing the
seatbelt.
2. Hold the end of the plate ① and pull it
under the abdomen.
3. Hold the plate ① and fit it into the 2-point 5. The seat belt should go over the pelvis
center buckle ② until a clicking sound is under the abdomen.
heard. Make sure that the belt is not
6. Make sure that the belt is tightly fit and
twisted.
not twisted.
WARNING
WARNING
After wearing the seat belt, pull the belt hard
Make sure that the seat belt goes over the pel-
with a hand to ensure that the belt is securely
fastened. vis, not the waist. If the seat belt is not properly
worn over the pelvis, a car crash can lead to
4. Hold the loose part of the belt and pull it severe injuries of your abdomen and other parts.
until the belt presses against the pelvis
under the abdomen comfortably but yet 7. Press the release button ① on the buckle
tightly. If it is necessary to adjust the to release the plate ②.
length of the belt, set the plate belt
upright and pull it.

2-6
 Front seat adjustment device

(15)
Air suspension seat components
(1) Slider lever
(2) Damping force control lever
(3) Height control lever
(4) Seat heater switch
(16)
(5) Seatback reclining lever
(6) Upper seatback air-pack control switch

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

(7) Lower seatback air-pack control switch
(8) Lumbar support air-pack control switch
(9) Upper seatback air-pack
(9) (10) Lower seatback air-pack
(14)
(11) (11) Lumbar support air-pack

(10) (12) Cushion slide control lever

(13) Cushion tilt control lever
(14) Armrest angle control knob
(12) (13) (15) Automatic transmission stay*
(8)
(6) (16) Ventilation seat*
(7) (5)

(4)
(3)
(1) (2)

2-7
How to use the air suspension seat
(1) Slider lever: Use this lever to move the seat front and back. (12) Cushion slide control lever: This is used to move the cushion
forward or backward when driving or taking a rest.
(2) Damping force control lever: The damping force control lever
maintains satisfactory riding comfort by adjusting the (13) Cushion tilt control lever: This is used to adjust the angle of
damping force of the shock absorber in the seat either softer the cushion end to meet the driver’s body type.
or firmer based on the road condition. · Scope of angle adjustment:
(3) Height control lever: The height control lever is used to adjust upward : 5° ±1° downward : 5° ±1°
the seat height to meet the driver’s body type.
(14) Armrest angle control knob: This is used to adjust the angle
(4) Seat heater switch: The seat heater switch is used to warm of the armrest for comfortable riding.
the seat cushion and seatback. Push it up (ON) to warm the
seat and push it down (OFF) to stop heating. (15) Automatic transmission stay*: It is installed on automatic
transmission vehicles.
· Bimetal operating temperature
(16) Ventilation seat*: The ventilation switch can be used to keep
30±3℃ : ON 40±3℃ : OFF the seat cushion and seatback cool.
(5) Seatback reclining switch: This switch is used to adjust the
angle of the seatback to meet the driver’s body type.
(6)(7)(8) Upper seatback, lower seatback, and lumbar support air-
pack control switch: These switches are used to adjust the
seat to meet the driver’s body type.
Switch (6) operation: Press the upper section of the switch to
add air to the air pack (9). Press the lower section to
remove air from the air pack.
Switch (7) operation: Press the upper section of the switch to
add air to the air pack (10). Press the lower section to
remove air from the air pack.
Switch (8) operation: Add air to the air pack (11) for stronger
lumbar support and remove air from the air pack for softer
lumbar support.

2-8
Slider lever Damping force control lever

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

While pulling the slider lever up, adjust the seat forward or
backward.
It helps maintain the driver and passengers’ driving comfort by
controlling the damping force of the seat damper either softer or
firmer based on the road condition.
CAUTION
Adjusting the damping force firmer is the same as fixing the seat. If the
damping force is set firmer, height adjustment and quick down function
will not work smoothly. Therefore, before adjusting the height, adjust the
damping force softer.

2-9
Height control lever Seat heater switch

Adjust the height of the seat by controlling the lever located on Operate the seat heater switch with the ignition switch in the
the side of the seat. ACC or ON position to warm the seat cushion and seatback.

WARNING Push it up (ON) to warm the seat and push it down (OFF) to stop
heating.
Adjusting the height of the seat while driving may result in accidents.
Please adjust the seat height before driving. · Bimetal operating temperature
30±3℃ : ON
40±3℃ : OFF

2 - 10
Seatback reclining lever Upper seatback air-pack control switch

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

While pulling up the lever on the side of the seat, adjust the Adjust the height of the seatback to meet the driver’s body type.
seatback angle and release the lever. Push the upper seatback air pack control switch to add air to the
pack for better seatback support.
WARNING
Adjusting the seatback angle while driving may result in accidents. Please
adjust the seatback angle before driving.

WARNING
Tilting the seatback too much backward will reduce the protection effect
of the seatbelt. In case of a crash, the body will slip under the seatbelt,
resulting in serious injuries or death. Make sure to place the seatback up
(the interior angle between the seatback and the under-cushion should
be about 90 – 100 º) and sit upright.

2 - 11
Lower seatback air-pack control switch Lumbar support air-pack control switch

Adjust the height of the seatback to meet the driver’s body type. Adjust the lumbar support properly according to the driver's body
Push the lower seatback air pack control switch to discharge air type. Press the upper section to add more air to the pack and
and lower the height of the seatback. increase the lumbar support strength. Press the lower section to
remove air from the pack to soften the lumbar support.

2 - 12
Cushion slide control lever Cushion tilt control lever

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

While pulling up the control lever, adjust the cushion forward or
backward.
While pulling up the control lever, push the end part of the
cushion and adjust the angle upward or downward to meet the
driver’s body type.
Scope of adjustment angle: upward 5°±1°
downward 5°±1°

2 - 13
Armrest angle control knob Automatic transmission stay*

Armrest

Automatic
transmission stay

Adjust the armrest angle by turning the knob underneath the Installed on automatic transmission vehicles, the automatic
armrest left or right. transmission stay is used to shift gears while driving.
- While the vehicle is at a stop, pull the automatic transmission
CAUTION stay up to rotate the armrest, which will make it easy for the
Using the armrest angle control knob while driving will disturb gear shift- driver to move to the bed.
ing operation. - Before leaving the vehicle, first lower the automatic
transmission stay and lower the armrest.

WARNING
Rotating the automatic transmission stay and armrest while driving may
cause accidents. Avoid the rotation.

CAUTION
Forcing the automatic transmission stay may damage it. Use with caution.

2 - 14
Ventilation Seat*

Under the
dashboard

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

The driver can use the ventilation switch to create a comfortable
driving condition. By operating the ventilation switch, the driver
can cool the seat cushion and seatback area. Dial up the switch
to start the ventilation, and turn the dial all the way up to get the
maximum air speed.

2 - 15
Vehicle with Bed-Sleeper Cab
Vehicle with Bed-Sleeper Cab
Do not ever use the bed while the vehicle is moving or used for
work.
WARNING
In case of sudden stop, sudden acceleration, unexpected accidents or
any other emergency situations or rapid movements while the vehicle
is running, passengers who use the bed will fall off or be bumped into
objects, resulting in injuries. Do not ever use the bed while the vehicle is
moving or used for working.
Bed heater
By leaning the passenger’s seat back, it creates a wide space,
which can be used as a bed. The temperature of the bed can be
controlled by a temperature controller.
CAUTION
1. This bed heater is exclusively for this vehicle and cannot be used for
other purposes.
2. Turn on the temperature control switch and confirm that the indicator
is turned on.
3. Cover the bed with a blanket 20 to 30 minutes before using the bed
and turn on the bed heater for warmer and cozy bed.
4. The temperature can be set between 30 and 60º (±5º).
5. Using the bed heater for 8 hours or more continuously may discharge the
battery. To use the bed heater for a long time, keep the engine running.
(Since it contains the battery low voltage detection circuit, it may not work
correctly if the battery voltage is too low. After using the bed heater for
some time, make sure to charge the battery again by running the engine.)
6. If the ambient temperature is over 30º, it may not heat up.
7. In case of damage on the bed surface by a sharp object, have the
bed heater checked by a nearby repair shop.
8. Do not use the bed heater in case of contamination on the surface of
the bed heater or where the surface is torn out.
9. The temperature controller is susceptible to impact. Therefore, keep
it from any impact. Do not force the dial when turning it.
10. Make sure to power off the bed heater when it is not used.
NOTE
- The bed heater is operated by the bed controller module located at the
back of the driver’s seat.
- For further information, refer to the digital temperature controller manual
for diesel vehicle supplementary heating devices.

2 - 16
 B Type-seats and occupant protection systems
1) Seat belt
Always wear your safety belts!
Occupant protection has been the focus of much private and
public research and development for many years. The two
vehicle components which are incorporated into the vehicle
solely for the protection of the occupants in vehicle accidents are
the safety belts provided at each seating position and the
supplemental restraint system, or air bags, provided at the driver
and front passenger seat positions. The safety belts can protect
you and your passengers only if they are used. The air bag is a
supplemental protective device that is more effective and safer
as a restraining device when the safety belts are being used.
Why wear safety Belts?
Safety belts are helpful for several distinct reasons:
(1) Safety belts attach the occupants to the vehicle so that they
will not be ejected during an accident.
(2) Safety belts attach the occupant to the vehicle so that they
can use the space between their pre-crash seating position
and the front of the vehicle to slow down to a stop more
gradually, as their safety belts stretch and the front end of the
vehicle absorbs the energy of the crash by crumpling.
(3) Safety belts keep the driver in his seat, so that the driver
might have a chance to regain control in certain a accident
situations.
(4) Safety belts keep occupants from being catapulted into and
injuring the driver and other occupants.
Warning
In most country, the law requires safety belt use. As the owner and driver
of your vehicle, you must make certain that each occupant is properly
wearing the safety belt provided at the seating position.
Warning
While run when do not put seat belt, can not receive legal guarantee of
cost injury of life when accident happens.
Warning
Pregnant women, injured, and physically impaired persons should also
wear safety belts. Like all other occupants, they are more likely to suffer
serious injury or death, if they do not do so.
Warning
2. Seats and Passenger Protection System
Why safety belts work, how to wear them, and how to adjust your seat
position properly, is explained in this section. Read all of the information
provided and always observe these instructions and warnings in order
to gain the full benefit of these safety systems.
Warning
Safety belts have been shown to be the single most effective protection
against injury or death in a vehicular accident!
Warning
2 persons of seat belt cannot use together by 1 seat. If 2 persons use
together, can not receive protection by seat belt.
Warning
Don't fix any assist device to seat belt, because protection effect of seat
belt is decreased.
Warning
If confirm the problem of seat belt you must inspect in service station.
Caution
Safety belts cannot work unless they use in crash.
2 - 17
2) Seat belt lamp 3) Using seat belt

Seat belt lamp light up on ignition switch “ON” position, and then
the lamp light off putting seat belt.
NOTE
For the vehicle equipped with the B5.9 engine, the indicator and warning
buzzer will be activated for 30 seconds until warning the seat belt.
Caution
If the seat belt lamp light up or off continually, you must inspect in service
station.
(1) Three-point safety belts
3 points seat belt is installed to seat.
Desire to put by following order.
• Driver control a good position of seat before put seat belt
• Pick up the safety belt latch plate and use it to pull the belt a
cross your body. Make sure the belt is hot twisted, push the
latch plate firmly into the buckle until the mechanism clicks.

2 - 18

Warning
Position the shoulder belt midway over the shoulder and cross the chest.
Never place the shoulder belt across the neck. This assures that in the
case
of a collision, the belt applies force to the shoulder bones and keeps the
impact away from ribs or neck, helping to avoid serious internal injuries.
2. Seats and Passenger Protection System
Warning
Do not put belt floppily absolutely protection effect of seat belt is de-
creased.
To remove the seat belt, press the red button on the buckle.

• Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

2 - 19
 4) Putting on pregnant's seat belt

LL
PU
ER
TIR

ULL
RER

(2) Seat belt height adjustment Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women.
To operate safety belts with a height adjustable upper point, Warning
do the following.
Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured
• Put on the safety belt if they do not wear safety belt. To provide maximum protection, a pregnant
• Pull the safety belt height adjuster in the area indicated by woman should wear a three-point belt, she should wear the lap portion
of the belt as low as possible throughout her pregnancy.
the arrow in the illustration
• Adjust the safety belt height Control position of seat so that handle and pedal control may be
convenient.
Warning
Warning
Mis adjustment of the safety belt height could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt in a crash. Do not adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving.

Warning
Desire to confirm whether seat fixed certainly after seat control.

2 - 20
5) Seat adjustment

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

(1) Seat slide adjustment
To move the front seat forward or backward:
1. Pull up and hold the lever located under the front side of
the front seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the lever.
(2) Seat reclining adjustment
To tilt seatback forward or backward, lift the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion until the seatback is adjusted to
the desired position.
Warning
• Do not adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving.
• Driver could lose control of the vehicle.
• Injury and property damage could result.

Warning
• Do not position either front seat-back in the reclined position while the
vehicle is being operated.
• If a crash occurs, front occupants in reclined seats can lose restraining
benefits of the seatback and safety belts by sliding out from under the
safety belt or by being thrown into the seat belt in an awkward position.
• Serious injuries, death, and ejection from the vehicle can result.

2 - 21
 Height and tilt
adjustment lever
1 2

(3) Driver seat height adjustment (4) Height and tilt adjustment lever(1: forward, 2: backward)
To adjust the driver's seat cushion angle, lift the lever on the Lifting up of the lever will adjust the seat as shown; pulling
outside of the seat cushion down of the lever will bring it back to its original position.

Warning
• Do not adjust the driver's seatback while the vehicle is moving
• Driver could lose control of the vehicle.
• Injury and property damage could result.

2 - 22
 2. Seats and Passenger Protection System
(5) Head restraint adjust (6) Arm restraint adjust
If the head restraint must be removed for any reason. Use the arm restraint after folding to front.
1. Pull it up to the stop position.
2. While pushing the release button, lift the head restraint from Caution
the guide sleeve.
Make sure that the arm restraint interrupt control of vehicle on driving.
Warning
Make sure that the head restraint has been put back into place and
readjusted before driving.

3. Replace head restraint and reset it in intended position

before driving.

2 - 23
6) Air suspension seat* ※ Adjustment of the seat
1. Seat lock lever: Use it when you need to secure the seat.
2. Slide adjustment lever: This lever is used for moving the
seat forward or backward.

Caution
If the lever 3, 4, 5, or 6 is manipulated after the seat lock lever has been
9 locked, the seat lock lever is put under overload. To release it, depress
3 4 5 6 7 the brake pedal to release air from the air tank, then manipulate the
8 seat lock lever.

1 3, 4. Lumbar support adjustment buttons: These buttons are

used for properly adjusting the seat to your posture.
2 Manipulating of the buttons 3: Use the upper button
when supplying air for the air pack 8, and use the lower
button when releasing air from it.
Manipulating of the buttons 4: Use the upper button
1. Seat lock lever when supplying air for the air pack 9, and use the lower
2. Slide adjustment lever button when releasing air from it.
3. Lumbar support adjustment buttons (or lever)
4. Lumbar support adjustment buttons (or lever)
5. Height and tilt adjustment lever (forward)
6. Height and tilt adjustment lever (backward)
7. Back angle adjustment lever
8. Lumbar support air pack (lower)
9. Lumbar support air pack (upper)

2 - 24
 Height and tilt
adjustment lever
Back angle
Adjustment lever

2. Seats and Passenger Protection System

5, 6. Height and tilt adjustment lever (5: forward, 6:backward) 7. Back angle adjustment lever
Lifting up of the lever will adjust the seat as shown; This lever is used for adjusting the seat back to obtain the
pulling down of the lever will bring it back to its original desired back angle.
position.

2 - 25
7) MR damper seat* 8) Seat heater*

ON

OF
F
SO
FT

FI
RM

You can control the cashion of damper. Over “ACC” Ignition switch, If you turn on a seat heater switch,
seat cushion and back is warm
• Bimetal
20± 3°C : ON
30± 3°C : OFF

2 - 26
MEMO

2 - 27
MEMO

2 - 28
3. Doors and Locks
Chapter 1

Chapter 2
Location and name of doors and locks....... 3-2 Opening and closing aqueous urea inlet..... 3-11
Chapter 3
Opening and closing doors.......................... 3-4 Opening and closing cargo bed................ 3-12
Chapter 4
Opening and closing central door lock....... 3-5 Bumper step............................................... 3-14
Chapter 5
Opening and closing windows with Opening and closing exterior storage Chapter 6
power window switch (one-touch type)......... 3-6 compartment (for vehicle with sleeper
Chapter 7
cab).............................................................. 3-15
Opening and closing front inspection
Chapter 8
panel............................................................... 3-7 Caution and Warning when using
Doors and locks......................................... 3-17 Chapter 9
Opening and closing fuel inlet................... 3-10
Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Location and name of doors and locks
Door opening lever
Exterior storage compartment (sleeper cab)

Front inspection panel

release lever Bumper step Fuel inlet Aqueous urea inlet

※ The location and shape of the doors and locks may differ by vehicle specifications.

3 -2
 Exterior storage compartment Window lock switches &
opening lever (sleeper cab) Door opening lever

3. Doors and Locks

Front inspection panel
opening lever Door lock/release knob Rear gate opening lever

※ The location and shape of the doors and locks may differ by vehicle specifications.

3 -3
Opening and closing doors
Opening and closing doors
WARNING
If you leave a child in the vehicle unattended while the key is in the
ignition switch, the child may touch the power window or other device,
which may cause serious injuries or death. Make sure to take the key
off from the ignition switch.

CAUTION
Lock all doors and take the key with you before parking or stopping and
leaving the vehicle. Otherwise, your vehicle may be at a risk of being stolen.

Lock Unlock

1) Locking and unlocking door

The driver ’s and passenger ’s doors can be locked or
unlocked with the key. Turn the key clockwise to unlock the
door and counterclockwise to lock the door.

NOTE
To prevent from locking the doors while leaving the key inside, the driver’s
door can be locked from outside only by using the key.

WARNING
Do not leave children or pets inside the vehicle unattended. Since the
vehicle’s indoor temperature will rise faster than the outdoor temperature,
this may cause serious injuries or death.
To lock the doors from inside, push the lock button down and to
unlock the doors, pull the lock button upward.
To lock the passenger’s door, except the driver’s door, from
outside, push the lock button and close the door.

3 -4
 Opening and closing central door lock
NOTE
Locking or releasing the driver’s door using the key or the lock button will
lock or unlock the passenger’s door at the same time.
CAUTION
The driver’s door can be locked only with the key. It cannot be locked
by pushing the lock button. This is to prevent the driver from locking the
door while leaving the key inside.
2) Opening doors
Pulling the indoor opening lever from the driver’s seat will
open the door regardless of the lock status. Other doors can
be opened when they are not locked and the door opening
lever is pulled either from inside or outside the vehicle.
WARNING
Opening the doors while driving may cause accidents. Make sure that
the doors are fully closed before driving.
Opening and closing central door lock
3. Doors and Locks
The door lock button on the driver's door is connected to the
central door lock device.
With this device, the driver can open the passenger’s door by
using either the key from outside or the button inside.
To lock the passenger’s door, push the lock button from the driver’s seat.
To unlock the passenger’s door, pull up the lock button on the
driver’s seat.
3 -5
Opening and closing windows with power window switch (one-touch type)
Opening and closing windows with power
window switch (one-touch type)

Passenger's window switch

Window switch on driver’s side The switch operation is the same as that on the driver’s seat.
▶ To open the window
Push the front of the switch gently to fully open the window WARNING
automatically. (auto-down) To abort the auto-down operation, While children are in the vehicle, do not leave the vehicle unattended
pull up the switch or push it gently again while the window is with the key in the ignition switch. They may operate the window, which
opening. may have their hand or head stuck on the window, causing serious
▶ To close the window
injuries or death.

Pull up the front of the switch gently to fully close the window
(auto-up). To abort the auto-up operation, pull up the switch WARNING
or push it gently again while the window is closing. Sticking out the face, hand or other parts of the body through the open
window while driving may cause accidents.

3 -6
 Opening and closing front inspection panel
Opening and closing front inspection panel

3. Doors and Locks

Opening (3) Put the hands under the radiator grill and pull the lever on the
(1) Set the key in the “OFF” position. left side (seen from the front of the vehicle) toward you to
release the lock of the front inspection panel.
(2) P ull the front inspection panel lever under the left of the
dashboard. (4) Pull and open the front inspection panel.

3 -7
 • B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine: You can find the dipstick
between the injection pump and fuel filter on the left side

⑤
of the engine (driver side) by raising the cab.
① ④ Engine oil inlet
※ DL06K, F4AE3681 (IVECO) & B5.9 (CUMMINS) engines:

⑥
The engine oil inlet can be found on the engine head by
raising the cab.
⑤ Fresh air filter

② ⑦ CAUTION

④
Long-term use of a filter with lots of dirt may damage the air conditioner’s

③
blower motor. Replace it at every 10,000 km. (Replace it at a shorter
interval if it is used in a polluted area.)

⑥ Washer fluid inlet

(5) The following items can be checked, replenished and cleaned
with ease by opening the front inspection panel:
① Clutch fluid tank
② Coolant tank
CAUTION
When adding coolant, add some coolant first, run the engine for about 3
minutes, and add more coolant up to the MAX level before driving the vehicle.
⑦ Bug screen
If the bug screen is contaminated by dirt or bugs, take the
screen off and clean it with compressed air thoroughly.
CAUTION
Continuous running of the vehicle with the contaminated bug screen will
cause engine overheating.

③ Engine oil dipstick

※ Engine oil dipstick location by engine type
• DL06K (DOOSAN) engine: The engine oil dipstick can be
found between the ECU and oil filter on the right side of
the engine (passenger side) by raising the cab.
• F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: The engine oil dipstick can
be found on top of the ECU on the left side of the engine
(driver side) by raising the cab.

3 -8
 3. Doors and Locks
Closing
(1) Slowly push and close the front inspection panel. Push the
panel until you hear a clicking sound underneath.
(2) Confirm that the front inspection panel is securely locked.

WARNING
If the front inspection panel is not securely locked, it may open while
driving and block the driver’s sight, causing accidents.

3 -9
Opening and closing fuel inlet
Opening and closing fuel inlet
Operation ① Operation ②

Open Close

Close Open

(1) Turn off the engine.
(2) Turn the fuel inlet cap key clockwise all the way to the end.
CAUTION
Use of poor quality fuel or inappropriate fuel additives may damage the
engine and emission control devices. Make sure to use the specified fuel.
CAUTION
If fuel gets on the vehicle body, it can damage the painted surface. Wipe
it out immediately with cold water.
(3) Turn the fuel inlet cap counterclockwise to open it. Add fuel
through the inlet.
(4) After adding fuel, turn the fuel inlet cap clockwise to close the
cap.
(5) Make sure to turn the fuel inlet cap key counterclockwise and
take out the key.
(6) Verify that the fuel inlet cap spins with no traction.
(spinning without traction shows that the cap is locked)
WARNING
For preventing fire, turn off the engine before adding fuel and keep
cigarettes, flames, or other inflammables away.

3 - 10
 Opening and closing aqueous urea inlet
Opening and closing aqueous urea inlet
Operation ①
Open Close
(1) Turn off the engine.
(2) Turn the aqueous urea inlet cap key counterclockwise all the
way to the end.
CAUTION
· If made contact to the skin, aqueous urea will irritate it, causing skin
diseases. If the skin (or hair) is contaminated by aqueous urea, take
off all the clothing contaminated and wash the skin with water.
· Add more aqueous urea to the tank only when the urea level in the tank
is below the half level.
· Never add aqueous urea to the tank over the MAX limit line.
· Never add aqueous urea to the tank while the engine is running or the
PTO is activated.
· Never add aqueous urea over the MAX limit line on the level gauge.
Overflowing urea can be frozen in winter, leading to frozen tank.
Operation ②
Open Close
3. Doors and Locks
CAUTION
· Use only the genuine aqueous urea in the aqueous urea tank. Injecting
diesel or other additives may cause the exhaust system to malfunction.
· Do not fill the fuel tank with aqueous urea. It will damage the fuel system.
WARNING
Damage occurred due to negligence of the above instructions will void
the warranty and cause expensive repair.
(3) Turn the aqueous urea inlet cap counterclockwise and open
it. Add aqueous urea through the inlet.
(4) After adding aqueous urea, turn the aqueous urea inlet cap
clockwise to close the cap.
(5) Make sure to turn the aqueous urea inlet cap key clockwise
and take out the key.
(6) Verify that the aqueous urea inlet cap spins with no traction.
(Spinning without traction shows that the cap is locked.)
3 - 11
Opening and closing cargo bed
Opening and closing cargo bed
② Side fastening post

③ ①
②

① Rear gate (right), Side gate (back) ③ Side gate (front)

Open the cargo bed by turning up the lever and leaning it inwards. Open the cargo bed by pulling up the side gate front lever and leaning
it inwards.

3 - 12
 WARNING
· If you release the gate suddenly to access the cargo bed, the gate will
fall freely due to its weight, causing vehicle damage and accidents.
· When closing the cargo bed, take caution against safety accidents as
the heavy weight of the gate may cause injuries to your waist.

WARNING
Make sure to verify that the gate of the cargo bed is completely closed
before driving. If the gate is open while driving, it may cause the fall of

3. Doors and Locks

freight, damage of other vehicles, and other accidents.

3 - 13
Bumper step
Bumper step

To clean the windshield, step on the bumper steps. Use the handgrip nearby the wiper.

3 - 14
 Opening and closing exterior storage compartment (for vehicle with sleeper cab)
Opening and closing exterior storage
compartment (for vehicle with sleeper cab)

3. Doors and Locks

② Then, the lock will be released.
Opening
① Pull the exterior storage compartment opening lever under the
driver’s or passenger’s door.

3 - 15
Closing
① Push the exterior storage compartment panel down to close it.
② Verify that the panel is securely locked.

WARNING
If the panel is not securely locked, it may open while driving, and objects
inside it may fall off.

3 - 16
 Caution and Warning when using Doors and Locks

Caution and warning when using doors and locks

• Make sure that children do not touch any switches, door opening levers, door locks/release knobs, selection levers, or shift lever.
• Take caution not to have your hand or part of the body stuck into any window, door, rear gate or fuel inlet when opening or
closing them.
• While driving, all the doors, tailgate and fuel inlet should be completely closed.
• When children are on board, make sure that they do not use various doors and locking system. Carelessness may result in accidents.
• Sticking out the hand, head or other body parts through the window may result in accidents. Do not expose the parts of the body
outside the vehicle.

3. Doors and Locks

3 - 17
MEMO

3 - 18
4. Inside and Outside Control System
Chapter 1
Interior Switches.........................................................4-2 Adjusting Electric Outside Rear View Mirror Angle
Chapter 2
(For Vehicles With Electronic Engines)..................4-16
Ignition Key.................................................................4-3
Chapter 3
Steering Wheel Audio Switch & Mono-Lcd Display
Remote Control Key...................................................4-6 Switch (For Vehicles With Electronic Engines).....4-17 Chapter 4
Immobilizer System (Royal Model)...........................4-9 Center Console Unit.................................................4-18 Chapter 5

Lamp Switches.......................................................... 4-11 Instrument Cluster Brightness Control Knob Chapter 6

(For Vehicles With Electronic Engines)..................4-19
How To Activate Cruise Control/Pto Function Chapter 7
(For Vehicles With Electronic Engine)....................4-13 Auxiliary Ignition Switch..........................................4-19
Chapter 8
Switches For Wiper And Washer.............................4-14 Tilting Cab.................................................................4-20
Chapter 9
Exhaust Brake Switch..............................................4-15 Hazard Warning Lamp Switch.................................4-25
Chapter 10
Ventilation Seat Switch (Vehicles With
Chapter 11
Electronic Engines)*.................................................4-25
Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Interior Switches

• Turn signal lamp switch

• Switches for passing and headlamps
• Switches for cruise control

Button-style steering column lock/

unlock device
• Switches for wiper and washer fluid
• Exhaust/Engine brake switch

Steering wheel audio switch &

TFT-LCD display switch

Center console
switch
• Ignition key switch
• Remote control key switch

Light switch

Ventilation seat switch

※ The vehicle may not be equipped with this depending on its model.

4-2

Ignition Key
This vehicle's owner is provided with two keys and the key
number tag on which the key identification number is engraved.
When closing the doors without using the key, make sure that you
do not lock the doors with the keys left in the vehicle. For
emergency, make sure to keep one key in a secure separate place.
NOTE
If you lose the keys, keys and all other related parts must be replaced.
CAUTION
Leaving the keys inside the vehicle may result in vehicle theft.
Ignition Key
Location and function of ignition key
4. Inside and Outside Control System
The ignition switch operates in the four-step process as shown
below.
WARNING
Do not operate the key through the opening of the steering wheel. If the
steering wheel makes a sudden turn due to exterior factors, your finger,
hand and/or arm will be injured.
· LOCK: you can insert or take out the key from the ignition
switch only while the key is in this position.
WARNING
Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position while driving. The engine will
be turned off and the steering wheel will be locked, resulting in accidents.
· ACC: When the key is in this position, the radio, cigarette
lighter, seat heater, bed heater and power socket can be used.
4-3
 NOTE
If the key does not move when turning it from the “LOCK” position to the
“ACC” position as the steering wheel is locked, try turning the key while
turning the steering wheel gently left and right, which will lock the steering
wheel and the key will move to the “ACC” position easily.
CAUTION
Leaving the key in the “ACC” position for an extended period of time may
discharge the battery.
· ON: When the key is in this position, the battery power is
delivered to various electronic devices. Leave the key in this
position while driving.
CAUTION
Leaving the key in the “ON” position for a long time while the engine is
turned off may discharge the battery.
WARNING
Never take the key off from the ignition switch while driving. The engine will
be turned off and the steering wheel will be locked, resulting in accidents.
NOTE
When attempting to turn the engine on more than one minute after leav-
ing the key in the “ON” position (with the engine stopped), make sure
to turn the key back to the “OFF” position before turning on the engine.
4-4
NOTE
※ Idling shutdown
· The engine will turn itself off five minutes after idling.
· When the cab is tilted or the vehicle is under other work, the idling
shutdown will start five minutes after the ignition key is turned to “ON” in
order to protect the ECM and to prevent accidents. When this function is
activated, turning the key to the “START” position won't start the engine.
· If the idling shutdown function is activated, turn the ignition key back to
the “OFF” position, wait for approx. 4 - 5 seconds, and restart the engine.
· Preheating the engine
① The engine is equipped with the preheat and after-heat
devices that will improve the ignition performance and
reduce white smoke.
② When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the
engine is automatically preheated based on the coolant
temperature, and after 0.3 seconds (summer) or 18
seconds (winter), the preheat indicator on the instrument
panel is turned off, indicating that the engine preheat has
been completed.
③ When attempting to start the engine before the preheat
indicator is turned off, the amount of white smog will
increase as the preheat device is not working.
· START: Start the engine by turning the ignition key to this
position.
CAUTION
· Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
· Do not continue keep the key turned to the “START” position for more
than ten seconds.
· Restarting the engine while it has already been started may damage the
start motor. Never restart the engine when it has already been started.
· The engine will start only when the shift lever is in the neutral position.
 ACC
· It will turn the engine off.
· You will not be able to take the key out. ON
LOCK
· The steering wheel will not be locked.
· Some electronic devices will work. · All electronic devices will work.
· The key can be inserted or · The ignition key is on this position
taken out from the keyhole. while driving.
· Taking the key out while the

4. Inside and Outside Control System

· The steering wheel will not be locked.
ignition switch is in this
position will lock the steering
wheel.

START
· The engine will start.
· Release the key once the
engine starts after turning the
key to the “START” position.
· Then the key will return to the
“ON” position automatically.

Keyhole lighting function

· The keyhole light will be turned
on when opening the door.
· The keyhole light will continue to
be turned on for about seven
seconds after the door is closed.

4-5
Remote Control Key
Functions of remote control key Operation of remote controlled door lock and
The door can be locked and unlocked without using the key by the anti-theft device
remote control key within a specified distance.

NOTE LED
The remote control key may not function temporarily due to the local or sur-
rounding environment. In this case, use the mechanical key. Lock button

CAUTION Unlock button

The remote control key may be damaged if it is dropped in water or an
impact is applied to it. Panic button

NOTE
Key ring
· The remote control key will not work when the key is inserted to the igni-
tion switch.
· The anti-theft system functions even with any window open. Before leaving Button Duration Function
the vehicle, make sure to close all doors and windows.
Short for 0.5 The doors will be unlocked.
seconds
Unlock button
Long for more The windows will open.
than 2.5 seconds
Short for 0.5 The doors will be locked.
seconds
Lock button
Long for more The windows will close.
than 2.5 seconds
Long for 2.5 The panic alarm will sound
Panic button seconds (for 30 seconds).
The alarm will sound once for 30 seconds.
Anti-theft alarm (when attempting to open the door forcibly
while the anti-theft function is activated.)

4-6
● Unlocking doors
When pressing the unlock button on the remote control key
briefly (0.5 seconds), the turn signal lamps will blink twice and
the doors will be unlocked.
● Locking doors
When pressing the lock button on the remote control key
briefly (0.5 seconds), the turn signal lamps will blink once and
the doors will be locked.
● If you do not stop the alarm, the alarm will sound for up to 30
seconds.
● If you unlock the doors with the remote control key but do not
open them, the doors will be locked again after 30 seconds.
When the remote control key is damaged or lost
Every remote control key is encoded with its own code. If it is
necessary to buy a new key due to its damage, loss or other

4. Inside and Outside Control System

● Window down reasons, contact your local dealer.
When pressing and holding the unlock button (over 2.5
seconds) while the doors are locked or unlocked, the turn NOTE
signal lamps will blink twice and the windows will go down. (If · Once the new remote control key is encoded and set, any recovered old
you release the button while the windows are opening, the key cannot be used any more.
windows will stop.) · Up to two remote control keys can be paired to the vehicle.
● Window Up
When pressing and holding the lock button (over 2.5 Battery replacement interval for remote control keys
seconds) while the doors are locked or unlocked, the turn If the LED is blinking dimly or does not blink when pressing either
signal lamps will blink once and the windows will go up. the unlock or lock button on the remote control key, you need to
(If you release the button while the windows are closing, the replace the battery.
windows will stop.)
● How to replace battery for remote control key
① Detach the front panel of the remote control key from
● Stopping alarm
Push the lock or unlock button briefly (0.5 seconds) to stop
the back.
the alarm.
● Canceling alarm
The alarm will be canceled if you open the door with the key
or press the unlock button on the remote control key.
● Panic alarm
The panic alarm will sound if you push the panic button on the
remote control key while the doors are locked or unlocked or
while driving. (the alarm will sound and the turn signal lamps
will blink for 30 seconds.)

4-7
 ② Open the cover on the back of the remote control key,
WARNING
remove the old battery and insert a new one.
Never attempt to lock the doors when leaving the vehicle with children or
pets unattended. The indoor temperature of the vehicle will rise faster than
the temperature outside, resulting in serious injuries or death.

CAUTION
· Do not touch the circuit board or other parts if possible. It may cause
the remote control key to malfunction.
· Take caution not to touch the flat surface of the battery with bare fingers.
It may discharge the battery.

③ Close the back cover. NOTE

④ Once you replace the battery, make sure that the remote The used batteries, if not recycled, will have negative effect on the environ-
control key is working as expected. ment. Always recycle the used batteries and do not throw them away with
domestic garbage.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble the remote control key unless doing so to replace
its battery. It can cause malfunctions.
NOTE
For the normal operation of the remote control key, do not drop the remote
control key or place a heavy object on top of the remote control key. Also
keep it away from water or direct sunlight. If wet, wipe out the moist with soft
cloth and dry it at a cool place.

4-8
 Immobilizer System (Royal model)
Immobilizer System (Royal model)
The immobilizer system makes it impossible to start the engine CAUTION
with keys other than the ones permitted to use with the vehicle so
· Dropping off or applying impact to the key may damage the transponder.
as to prevent auto theft. The transponder inserted in the key grip
· The ignition key with the damaged transponder will not start the engine.
and the engine control unit contain the identical code. When
inserting the immobilizer ignition key into the key cylinder and
● Immobilizer Indicator
turning it to the “ON” position to start the engine, the engine control
The immobilizer indicator on the instrument cluster
unit compares its own code with the code from the transponder. comes on while communication between the

4. Inside and Outside Control System

The engine is started only if these codes are matched. immobilizer key and engine control unit is ongoing.
It goes off once the communication is completed
(the engine is started). If the immobilizer indicator
blinks and illuminates, there is a defect in the
system. Please contact DAEWOO’s repair
network for checkup and repair.

NOTE
The time taken for communication between the immobilizer key and engine
control unit varies by conditions. If this time is short, the immobilizer indica-
tor may not come on.

Only after the transponder and the engine control unit
communicate with each other and when their codes are identical
will the engine start. (The transponder is included in the ignition
key grip.)
CAUTION
· Modifying the vehicle and installing a remote starter without approval
may cause engine starting problems or accidents.
· Any repair on the immobilizer system should be performed only by a
DAEWOO-authorized workshop.
· Make sure that the vehicle owner is at present when deleting the code
of the transponder or registering another key.
· When the engine fails to start as the immobilizer communication is
not working due to external reasons (key ring, etc.), take the ignition
key out of the ignition switch, wait for about ten seconds and start the
engine again.

4-9

WARNING
The immobilizer system cannot be removed from the vehicle under no
circumstances. If removing or damaging it, it becomes impossible to start
the engine. Never remove, modify or damage the system.
● If the transponder (integrated in the key) is damaged
The immobilizer key with the damaged transponder will not be
able to start the engine. In this case, you can start the engine
only after replacing the transponder with a new one and
registering the corresponding code to the engine control unit.
● If the key is lost
If the key is lost, the lost key's code should be erased from the
engine control unit. To prevent a car theft by the lost key,
contact your dealer.
4 - 10
Engine Start Problem due to faulty immobilizer
communication
The engine control unit communicates with the transponder in the
grip of the immobilizer key and permits engine starting only if its
own code is matched with the code from the transponder. If such
communication is impossible due to internal or external problems, the
engine won't start. In this case, the immobilizer indicator will blink.
A vehicle with the immobilizer system may fail to start the engine
in the following cases:
● If two or more immobilizer keys are put together and used
● If the immobilizer key is close to a device that transmits or
receives electromagnetic or radio waves
● If the immobilizer key is close to an electric/electronic device
like a lighting device, security key or security card
● If the immobilizer key is close to a key ring, magnet, metal
object, or battery
● If you start the engine before the engine preheat is completed
● If you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position using an
immobilizer key and use another immobilizer key within 30
seconds, the engine ECU may still remember the previous code
and will not be able to recognize the second key as a legitimate key.
CAUTION
- The engine may not be started if the immobilizer communication problem
occurs or if trying to start the engine before its preheating time is over. In this
case, find and remove the cause, remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch, wait for approx. 15 seconds, and try to start the engine again.
- Have your vehicle serviced at a nearby DAEWOO repair shop if the im-
mobilizer indicator blinks and the engine won't start even after removing
any external problem causes.
 Lamp Switches
Lamp switch: located on the lower left of the
steering wheel

4. Inside and Outside Control System

The lamp switch is located on the lower left of the steering wheel.
The lamp switch located on the lower left of the steering wheel works
in three steps. At each step, the lamps will be turned on as follows:
Headlamp ON: tail lamp, license plate lamp and
instrument cluster lamps
Tail lamp ON: tail lamp, license plate lamp and
position lamp
Auto-light function: The headlamp and tail lamp are
automatically turned on and off based on the amount of
sunshine received by the auto-light sensor.

Lamp off: The lamps will be turned off.

Pulling the knob up with the tail lamps illuminated

turns on the fog lamps.
The knob cannot be pulled out in the OFF position.

4 - 11
Turn signal lamp switch: function of left lever
When turning left or right, pull or push the lever to turn on the left
or light turn signal lamps on the front and back of the vehicle as
well as the turn signal lamp on the door panel. Once the turn is
completed, the lever returns automatically to the middle position.
When changing the lane, maintain the mode of the lever until the
lane changing is completed. Push and release the lever gently to
have the turn signal lamps blink for seven times. To turn off the
turn or lane change signal lamps manually, return the lever to the
original position.
If the turn signal lamps keep blinking fast or do not turn off after making
the turn or changing the lane, the filament in the bulb may be blown.
Replace the bulb. If the filament is not blown, check the fuse.
4 - 12
Passing and headlamp switches: function of
left lever
When pushing down the left lever with the headlamps ON, the
high beam and the corresponding indicator on the instrument
cluster are turned on. Pushing up the lever turns on the low beam
again. Also, when pushing up the left lever, the high beam is
turned on instantly regardless of the headlamp condition.
Releasing the lever turns off the high beam.
WARNING
If you see another vehicle driving from the opposite side, quickly change
the high beam to the low beam. The high beam can blind the driver coming
from the opposite direction, leading to an accident.
How to activate cruise control/PTO function (for vehicles with electronic engine)
How to activate cruise control/PTO (by engine
types)
④
②
①
⑤ ③
● Step 1: Set the cruise control/PTO switch to the ON position ①.
Then, it is ready to activate the cruise control/PTO.
● Step 2: Perform the following step according to the engine
type to activate the cruise control/PTO. - This is to
activate the cruise control/PTO. (check the indicator
on the instrument cluster)
- DL06K (Doosan) engine: Turn the switch to the
INC position ② once.
- F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: Press the resume
button into the ON position ④ once.
● Step 3: Increase or decrease the the driving speed/RPM as
desired using the INC/DEC switches while the cruise
control/PTO is activated.
- If the engine speed or driving speed needs to be
increased, keep turning the switch to the INC
position ②.
- If the engine speed or driving speed needs to be
decreased, keep turning the switch to the DEC
position ③.
4. Inside and Outside Control System
● Step 4: When depressing the clutch/brake pedal with the
cruise control/PTO activated, the cruise control/PTO
is deactivated.
If pressing the resume button ④ once in this condition,
the driving speed/engine speed is returned to the
previous speed.
※ When the cruise control/PTO is not to be used, set the switch
to the OFF position ⑤.
● The cruise control/PTO function controls the fuel amount so
as to maintain the speed of the vehicle as the driver wants
while driving.
NOTE
※ For vehicles equipped with DL06K (Doosan) engine or F4AE3681 (IVECO)
engine
The switch increases the PTO enabling idling RPM to 700 when the PTO
is activated.
4 - 13
Switches for wiper and washer
Wiper switch: function of right lever Wiper intermittent operation interval control
switch: function of right lever

Turning the tip of the right lever can operate the windshield wiper
in three steps:
When the wiper switch is in the INT position, the operating
● OFF : The wipers are stopped.
duration of the wipers can be adjusted by turning the switch
● INT : The wipers are operated intermittently. forward and backward.
● LOW : The wipers are operated at a low speed.
● HI : The wipers are operated at a high speed. NOTE
The intermittent operation interval is automatically controlled according to the
WARNING driving speed when the driving speed is over 40 km/h.

Do not operate the wipers if the washer fluid tank is empty, the wiper
blades are frozen on the windshield or foreign materials are stuck on the
wiper blades. Operating the wipers under these conditions can damage
the wiper blades, wiper motor and glass. Also, abnormal wiper operation
can hinder the driver's view, resulting in an accident.

4 - 14

Washer switch: function of right lever
Pushing the tip of the right lever will spurt washer fluid. Pushing it
once will operate the wipers two to three times.
CAUTION
Pushing the washer button while there is no washer fluid left in the tank
may damage the washer motor.
WARNING
Attempting to clean the windshield in a cold winter with the wiper blades
after spraying washer fluid on the windshield may result in washer fluid
frozen on the glass. This may block the driver’s sight, leading to accidents.
Exhaust Brake Switch
Exhaust brake switch: function of right lever
4. Inside and Outside Control System
When the exhaust brake switch lever is pushed down, the
exhaust brake is activated and the corresponding indicator on the
instrument cluster comes on. The exhaust brake system is a
supplementary brake system to close the engine exhaust pipe in
order to get engine brake effect. The exhaust brake only works
while the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal are released.
NOTE
The exhaust brake operates only when the engine speed is over 1,000 RPM.
4 - 15
Adjusting electric outside rear view mirror angle (for vehicles with electronic engines)
Electric outside rear view mirror angle control
switch

The heated electric outside rear view mirrors can be operated

when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The L/R selection
switch can be used to select the left or right mirror. Then, move
the mirror position control joystick left/right/up/down to set the
selected mirror in a proper position.
Pushing the L/R selection switch toward the L position can select
the left mirror (driver side) while pushing the switch toward the R
position selects the right mirror (passenger side).

CAUTION
If moving the electric outside rear view mirror forcibly, it can lead to dam-
age. Make sure to use the controls to operate the mirror.

4 - 16
Steering wheel audio switch & mono-LCD display switch (for vehicles with electronic engines)

ENTER
Used to select each function on
the mono-LCD display.

PG▲
Used to move up on the menu
screen of the mono-LCD display.

PG▼
Used to move down on the menu
screen of the mono-LCD display.

4. Inside and Outside Control System

+ VOL -
Volume Up/Down MODE
Used to return to the main menu
from the initial screen of the
<< SEEK >> mono-LCD display in order to
• In CD player/cassette mode change the configuration or etc.
- Push it briefly: plays the next/previ-
ous track from the current track ESC
- Push and hold it: moves forward / Used to select a function and exit
backward on the current track the menu on the mono-LCD display.
• In radio mode
- Push it briefly: manual frequency TRIP
search, moves to another memo-
rized channel Every time the TRIP button (trip meter button), located on the right
- Push and hold it: automatic fre- side of the steering wheel, is pushed briefly (within 0.5 seconds), the
clock and the trip mileage will be displayed in turn.
※ Clock
quency search
AUDIO shows the current time. - A.M 12:34 - P.M 7:17
POWER Audio power ON/OFF ※ Trip meter
Select either TRIP A or TRIP B by pushing the TRIP button.
The audio mode changes · While in the TRIP A or TRIP B display mode, push the control
MODE each time the switch is switch for two seconds or more to initialize the trip meter to 0
pressed. and measure the mileage again.
· For example:
TRIP A: the first mileage from the location “A” to the location “B”
TRIP B: the second mileage from the location “B” to the location “C”

4 - 17
Center Console Unit

Allison Automatic ZF Automatic

Transmission Transmission

Transmission

Compartment

Switches Switches

Large-size Cub
Holders

4 - 18
Instrument cluster brightness control knob (for vehicles with electronic engines) / Auxiliary ignition switch

Instrument cluster brightness control knob Auxiliary ignition switch

(for vehicles with electronic engines)

4. Inside and Outside Control System

To raise the cab and check the engine, this switch can be used to
start the engine.
The brightness of the instrument cluster can be adjusted only
while the tail lamps are illuminated. Adjust it properly suitable for CAUTION
driving at night. Before starting the engine with this switch, make sure to check whether
the shift lever is in the neutral position and the parking brake is applied.
· Upward: darker
Also, the ignition switch should be in the ON position.
· Downward: brighter

NOTE
Brightness of the instrument cluster cannot be adjust for the vehicle equipped
with B5.9 engines. However, brightness of switches can be adjusted.

4 - 19
Tilting cab
Caution when tilting the cab

CAUTION
· Before tilting the cab, make sure to lock the front inspection panel
(front lid) completely.
· Stop the vehicle on a flat level surface, stop the engine and place the
ignition switch to the ON position.
· Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
· Place the shift lever in the Neutral position. If not, tilting the cab may NOTE
deform or damage the transmission parts.
· After making sure that there are no fragile objects inside the cab, take Check the information for tilting the cab on the decal attached on
off from the vehicle and close the door firmly. If there is any heavy the right side of the cab tilt lever.
object inside the cab or console box, it may damage the windshield
during the cab is being tilted.
CAUTION
· If you installed a separate luggage rack on the roof of the cab, load
freight of which weight is 80 kg or less. If there is a heavy load on the Make sure to place the direction switch lever to the down position before
roof while tilting, the cab may not be lifted or lowered properly.
driving.
· Chock each tire with a wooden support.
※ Cab tilt operating oil
· Check again if there is no passenger in the cab.
· Since heavy objects in the exterior storage box may damage the cab,
make sure again that it is securely fastened. Standard: ISU Chemical EQUIVIS ZS 15
· If any door is open while the cab is being tilted, the door may fall off,
damaging the cab or the door. Make sure to tilt the cab while all the CAUTION
doors are securely closed.
· Open the cab based on the following procedure. Never mix the specified oil with another oil.

4 - 20
How to raise the cab

Up

4. Inside and Outside Control System

Down

(1) Make sure to completely close the front inspection panel (3) Turn the pump direction switch lever, which is located on the
(front lid). right lower section of the cab, to the U (UP) position.

(2) Set the cap tilt release switch in the ON position with the (4) Push the switch to run the pump. The cab will start ascending.
ignition switch in the ON position.

4 - 21
 Lowering cab

Up

Down

(5) The cab will ascend while the switch is pushed, and based
on the operation of the switch, the cab opening angle can be
adjusted. Once the cab goes over the center of gravity,
noise will increase a bit. In this case, release the switch.
(1) Turn the pump direction switch lever to the D (DOWN) position.
(2) Push the switch to run the pump. The cab will start descending.
(3) When the cab descending operation is completed, release
the switch.

WARNING
· Do not start working if the cab is not completely tilted.
· Do not start the engine if the cab is not completely tilted or the cab is
descending.
· Never tilt the cab on a slope.

4 - 22
 Measure for cab tilt malfunction

4. Inside and Outside Control System

Up

Down

(4) Make sure to press the cab tilt release switch in the cab to
the OFF position. Also, check that the warning lamp is turned
off before driving.
CAUTION
· Before driving, make sure to set the pump direction switch lever in the D
(down) position.
· For malfunction related to the cab tilting system, have your vehicle serviced
at a nearby DAEWOO repair shop.
If the electric system malfunctions or the battery is discharged,
the cab can be tilted manually. Also if the cab tilting system
malfunctions, contact a nearby DAEWOO’s repair shop for
servicing.
● Raising cab
(1) Make sure to completely close the front inspection panel
(front lid).
(2) Place the pump direction switch lever in the U (up)
position.

4 - 23
 ● Lowering cab
(1) Place the pump direction switch lever in the D (DOWN)
position.
(2) Insert the cab tilt lever from the toolbox to the pump socket and
move it up and down to lower the cab.

(3) Fit the cab tilt lever from the cab tool box into the pump
socket and move it up and down to raise the cab.

NOTE
The operation of the hydraulic pump will not respond to the cab tilt lever, but
the cab will soon start tilting.

4 - 24
Hazard warning lamp switch / Ventilation seat switch (vehicles with electronic engines) *

Hazard warning lamp switch Ventilation seat switch *

4. Inside and Outside Control System

When pressing this switch, the front, rear and side turn signal By operating the ventilation seat switch, you can cool off the seat
lamps blink instantly regardless of the ignition switch position to cushion and the seatback. Scroll up the switch to start the
warn others. operation, and scroll the dial all the way up to get the maximum
air speed.
NOTE
The hazard warning lamp switch can be used to warn other drivers when
stopping on the road or driving at night.

4 - 25
MEMO

4 - 26
MEMO

4 - 27
MEMO

4 - 28
5. Instrument cluster
Chapter 1
Instrument cluster......................................... 5-2
Chapter 2

Indicators and Warning Lamps.................... 5-8 Chapter 3

Monochrome LCD display (for vehicle Chapter 4

with electronic engine)............................... 5-17 Chapter 5

Switching monochrome-LCD display Chapter 6

screen to main menu screen...................... 5-21
Chapter 7

Allison automatic transmission Chapter 8

monochrome-LCD display........................... 5-28
Chapter 9
ZF automatic transmission
Chapter 10
monochrome-LCD display........................... 5-29
Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Instrument cluster
<Type A>
LCD display type (monochrome)

※ Depending on the specifications, the location of various indicators and warning lamps on the LCD screen may differ.

5-2
<Type B>
B5.9 Engine

5. Instrument cluster
5-3
Tachometer Speedometer
B5.9 Engine B5.9 Engine

It shows the engine revolution per minute (RPM). It shows the current driving speed in km/h.
CAUTION
The engine overrun causes critical damage to the engine and caution needs
to be taken.

NOTE
Overrun
Overrun is the state of the engine that rotates faster than its maximum RPM.

NOTE
Depending on the RPM, the indicator color changes. Driving with the green lamp
ON will help improve the fuel efficiency (for vehicles with electronic engines).

5-4
Fuel gauge Temperature gauge
B5.9 Engine B5.9 Engine

5. Instrument cluster
This displays the fuel level in the fuel tank. When the needle is on It shows the temperature of the engine coolant.
the letter E, the fuel tank needs to be replenished. It is necessary
to keep a sufficient amount of fuel in the fuel tank for safe driving. CAUTION

CAUTION If the needle on the gauge goes up to the H zone, the engine
can be overheated. Therefore, park the vehicle in a safe place
Unspecified fuel may damage the engine. Always use the specified fuel. immediately and check the cooling system.

WARNING
Never open the coolant reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Hot
steam or water will spurt to burn your face or other body parts.

5-5
Air pressure gauge (Front)
B5.9 Engine
This gauge displays air pressure in the air tank. The normal
operation indication is 7.8 - 8.5 kg/cm2. Make sure that the gauge
indicates the normal operating condition before driving.
CAUTION
If the gauge needle falls below 5.3 bar while driving, the corresponding
warning lamp will come on with alarm sound. In this case, stop the vehicle
immediately and check for any defect. Then run the engine at a mid-level
speed to increase the air pressure before driving.
5-6
Air pressure gauge (Rear)
B5.9 Engine
This gauge displays air pressure in the air tank. The normal
operation indication is 7.8 - 8.5 kg/cm2. Make sure that the gauge
indicates the normal operating condition before driving.
CAUTION
If the gauge needle falls below 5.3 bar while driving, the corresponding
warning lamp will come on with alarm sound. In this case, stop the vehicle
immediately and check for any defect. Then run the engine at a mid-level
speed to increase the air pressure before driving.
TRIP button (B5.9 engine)
Ex) TRIP A: The distance from the staring point to particular point
TRIP B: The distance from the particular point to destination
Press the TRIP button to convert TRIP A into TRIP B
Reset the button shown by “0”, if pressing it more than 1
second

5. Instrument cluster
TRIP button

• ODOMETER/TRIPMETER
When pressing TRIP button less than 1 second, display trip
record in order as shown below.
(1) ODOMETER
(2) TRIP(A)
(3) TRIP(B)
1. ODOMETER
ODOMETER displays total mileage with km
2,3. TRIPMETER
TRIPMETER displays distance traveled in any 2 parts of
journey by 0.1km. They are shown as TRIP A & B

5-7
Indicators and Warning Lamps
Indicators and warning lamps come on when operating various levers or switches.
CAUTION
If the warning lamp comes on while driving, pull the vehicle over onto the shoulder immediately, and check the concerned area. If any key defect is found, contact
an authorized service center for repair.
Fuel preheat indicator (Yellow)
When fuel is frozen in winter, press the
fuel preheat switch. The indicator can also
come on when the engine automatically
preheats fuel.
Low washer fluid level warning lamp (Amber)
It comes on when the washer fluid level in
the washer fluid tank is low. Add more
washer fluid immediately.
Immobilizer indicator (Red)
This lamp comes on for 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position (for the
vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system).
The lamp goes off once the communication
between the ignition key and engine control unit is
properly completed when starting the engine.
The time taken for communication between the
immobilizer key and engine control unit varies by
conditions. If this time is short, the immobilizer
indicator may not come on.
CAUTION
If the immobilizer indicator is illuminated or blinks continuously, the immobilizer
system is malfunctioning. Have your vehicle serviced by your workshop.
5-8
Hill holder indicator (Amber)*
The hill holder indicator comes on while the
brake pedal is depressed after the hill holder
switch is pressed. Once the brake pedal is
released and the accelerator pedal is
depressed, the hill holder function is
canceled (that means, the braking pressure
is released) so that the vehicle can start. At
this point, the indicator also goes off.
NOTE
※ Hill holder function: When the driver stops uphill or downhill and moves the vehicle
again, the hill holder function helps prevent the vehicle from being rolled back
as the braking system holds the vehicle temporarily with the braking pressure.
CAUTION
· Activation of the hill holder function can be determined by whether the
indicator comes on when pressing the brake pedal while driving.
· The hill holder function works only on a vehicle that has no defect and
all systems work normally.
· ABS vehicles with the hill holder module system may consume a large
amount of air as the hill holder function holds the vehicle with the full
braking pressure. Therefore, caution should be taken when using the
hill holder function continuously.
WARNING
If the brake or accelerator pedal is not operated within approx. 2 seconds after
releasing the brake pedal with the hill holder function activated, the vehicle can
roll down on a slope. When the warning lamp comes on and the buzzer sounds,
depress the brake or accelerator pedal immediately.
Steering wheel adjustment indicator (White)
If you press the steering wheel control
switch to adjust the angle and height of
the steering wheel, the indicator will
come on for seven seconds. If pressing
the switch once more, it will go off;
otherwise, it will go off automatically
seven seconds after pressing the switch.
Parking brake indicator (Red)
Pushing the lever down for stopping or
parking applies the parking brake and
illuminates the indicator.
CAUTION
Make sure that the indicator is turned off before driving.
Toolbox warning lamp (Sleeper cab: White)
If the toolbox in the cab is open or
Seatbelt warning lamp (Red)
unlocked, this warning lamp comes on
and the warning buzzer sounds.
Air pressure warning lamp (Red)
If the air system line for the parking
brake is damaged or leaked, or there is
any defect on the air compressor so that
the pressure in the air tank may
decrease below the risky level (5.3 bar),
the warning lamp will come on and the
alarm will sound.
CAUTION
If the warning lamp comes on and the warning buzzer sounds, make sure
5. Instrument cluster
to stop the vehicle with the engine running. Resume driving only after
the warning lamp goes off.
WARNING
If you continue driving with the warning lamp on, it may degrade the brake
performance, leading to accidents.
If you operate the ignition switch without
wearing the seatbelt, the warning lamp
will come on. Once the seatbelt is worn,
the lamp will go off.
5-9
Engine oil pressure warning lamp (Red)
This lamp will come if the oil level is low
or the oil pressure in the lubrication
system is low. In this case, stop the
vehicle and check the oil level and
lubrication system.
CAUTION
If you continue driving with the engine oil pressure warning lamp on, the
engine parts may be seriously damaged.
WARNING
If you continue driving with the charging warning lamp on, the engine
may be turned off while driving, leading to accidents.
Check Engine warning lamp (Amber)
If the Check Engine warning lamp
comes on while driving, it indicates
that there is a defect on the engine.

Charging warning lamp (Red) CAUTION

It will come on when the ignition switch Although starting the engine may be possible, make sure to have your
is “ON” and will go off once the engine vehicle checked by your workshop immediately.
starts.
Stop Engine warning lamp (Red)
If the Stop Engine warning lamp
CAUTION
comes on during driving, it indicates
If the charge warning lamp comes on while driving, the battery is not one of the following conditions:
being properly charged. Therefore, turn off any unnecessary electrical - Faulty engine electronic control
devices and have your vehicle checked by your workshop immediately. system
- Faulty engine protective stop system
CAUTION
The charge warning lamp comes on when the battery is not being charged CAUTION
properly. Even if the charge system is malfunctioning during driving, driving
In case of defect on the engine electronic control system, stop the engine,
is still possible for some hours with the battery voltage. However, once the
contact a nearby DAEWOO service center and have your vehicle checked.
battery is completely discharged, the engine can be turned off while driving.

5 - 10
Fog lamp indicator (Green)
When the fog lamp switch is “ON”,
the indicator will come on together
with the external fog lamps.
Preheat indicator (Amber)
It indicates the preheat state. It comes
on once the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position and goes off once
the preheating is completed.

High beam indicator (Blue)

It comes on when the high beam is
Door ajar warning lamp (Red)
up.
B5.9 Engine The warning lamp will come on when

5. Instrument cluster
any door is open or not fully closed.

Front brake system warning lamp (Red)

CAUTION B5.9 Engine If the air system line is damaged or
leaked, or there is any defect on the air
Before driving, make sure that all doors are fully closed and check that
the door ajar warning lamp goes off.
1 compressor so that the pressure in the
air tank decreases below the risky level
(5.3 bar), the warning lamp will come on
and the warning buzzer will sound.

CAUTION
In this case, make sure to stop the vehicle with the engine running.
Resume driving only after the warning lamp goes off.

WARNING
If you continue driving with the warning lamp on, it may degrade the brake
performance, leading to accidents.

5 - 11
Rear brake system warning lamp (Red)
B5.9 Engine If the air system line is damaged or
leaked, or there is any defect on the air
2 compressor so that the pressure in the
air tank decreases below the risky level
(5.3 bar), the warning lamp will come
on and the warning buzzer will sound.
CAUTION
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) warning lamp
(Yellow)
In this case, make sure to stop the vehicle with the engine running.
Resume driving only after the warning lamp goes off.
WARNING
If you continue driving with the warning lamp on, it may degrade the brake
performance, leading to accidents.
Exhaust brake indicator (Amber)
When the exhaust brake switch is
operated, the indicator comes on to
indicate that the exhaust brake is
activated.
Work indicator (Green: premium)
B5.9 Engine When setting the work lamp switch in
the ON position, this indicator and
the work lamps come on.
5 - 12
CAUTION
The work lamps can come on by pressing the switch only when the vehicle
is at a stop or driven at 20 km/h or lower. Pressing the switch again turns
off the work lamps. If the driving speed exceeds 20 km/h with the
work lamps ON, the work lamps automatically go off. However,
the above conditions will not apply when driving backwards.
It comes on when the ABS is
malfunctioning.
CAUTION
The ABS warning lamp comes one for approx. 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. If it does not come on or comes on
while driving, the ABS system may have a problem. Have your vehicle
checked by your workshop immediately.
NOTE
What is ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)?
The ABS is a special brake system developed to prevent wheels from
locking when a vehicle makes a sudden stop. When a vehicle makes a
sudden braking on a wet or snowy road, its wheels can slip suddenly.
This situation can lead to loss of vehicle steering control, resulting in a
higher accident rate. To prevent this, the ABS is a vital system to ensure
vehicle safety.
ASR (Anti-Spin Regulator) warning lamp Cab tilt warning lamp (Red)
(Yellow) The warning lamp comes on when
This lamp comes on when the ASR is the cab is being tilted or the cab tilt
in operation or malfunctioning. lock has a fault.
ASR

CAUTION
NOTE
Check the warning lamp before driving, and if the warning lamp is on,
What is ASR (Anti-Spin Regulator)? check the locking device before driving.
The ASR is a device that detects wheel spinning or slipping and controls the
power according to the driving condition by regulating the control system.

5. Instrument cluster
In other words, to prevent wheels from spinning as the vehicle accelerates
on a snowy or rainy road, the ASR functions as an supplementary safety Fuel warning lamp (Yellow)
device that detects the speed of the front and rear wheels on the surface
to prevent spinning and improves the traction and stable acceleration rate. The warning lamp comes on when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is low. If
the fuel warning lamp is on, add fuel
ASR OFF indicator (White) as soon as possible.
This lamp comes on when the ASR
OFF switch is operated to deactivate
ASR the ASR or when the ASR is released. CAUTION
The fuel warning lamp may temporarily come on when the vehicle is driv-
ing on a steep uphill or downhill road or on a bumpy road with low fuel level.

PTO indicator (Amber: Premium)

B5.9 Engine This indicator comes on and the
warning buzzer sounds when
depressing the clutch pedal and setting
the PTO switch in the ON position.
Then, the PTO is ready for operation.

5 - 13
Automatic transmission oil temperature warning
lamp (White: ZF/Allison automatic transmission)
ZF Automatic This warning lamp is illuminated and
Transmission the ECU inhibits operation at a high
shift gear when the temperature of
the oil in the automatic transmission
STOP oil tank reaches 121℃ (250°F). In
this case, stop the vehicle and check
the transmission cooling system. If
Allison Automatic the transmission overheats during a
Transmission
normal driving condition, check the
transmission oil level.
If it is normal, set the shift lever in the
neutral position and run the engine at
1,200 - 1,500 rpm. Then, the
temperature of the transmission and
the engine should drop to the normal
level within two to three minutes.
If not, decrease the engine RPM. If the high temperature of the
transmission persists, stop the engine and contact an
authorized service center for repair.
Check automatic transmission warning lamp
(White: ZF/Allison automatic transmission)
If the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position, it will come on. Once the
engine starts, it will go off. If it comes
on while driving, parts related to the
automatic transmission may have a
problem. Have your vehicle checked
by your workshop immediately.
CAUTION
When pressing the up (↑) and down (↓) buttons simultaneously, the code
for the current problem is displayed.
Transmission range inhibitor warning lamp
(White: Allison automatic transmission)
It comes on when gear shifting is
disabled.

CAUTION
Do not run the engine at the maximum acceleration for more than 30
seconds while the transmission gear is engaged and the output is stopped.
If continued, the transmission oil temperature will increase excessively,
causing serious overheating of the transmission.

5 - 14
OBD warning lamp (Amber)
The OBD warning lamp comes on
when the emission control system is
not working properly. (insufficient
urea, SCR system fault, defective
sensor, defective motor, etc.)
Cruise PTO indicator (Amber)
This indicator is to show that the
engine speed control function is in
CRUISE operation. It comes on when the
cruise PTO switch is set in the ON
PTO position with the vehicle stationary.

NOTE
For detailed information, refer to the information about the emission
control system's output limit in Chapter 13.
Cruise control indicator (White)
It shows that the cruise control

5. Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature warning lamp (Red) CRUISE function is activated while driving.

90
While the cruise control function is
If the engine coolant temperature is
activated, the symbol “ CRUISE ” is
too high, the warning lamp will come km/h displayed on the LCD display. This
on. At this point, check the coolant,
symbol disappears when the cruise
and if necessary, add more coolant.
control function is deactivated.
In case of overheating, have your
vehicle checked by your workshop
immediately.

Throttle inhabit indicator (White)

For the premium model, this indicator
comes on when the remote throttle
THROTTLE switch is set in the ON position to
INHIBIT control the engine speed from the
outside.

5 - 15
Water in fuel warning lamp Turn signal indicator/hazard warning lamp
(Amber : F4AE3681 IVECO engine) (Green)
The warning lamp comes on if there is This blinks when the turn signal lamp or
water in the prefilter. If the warning lamp is hazard warning lamp is turned on.
on, stop the vehicle and discharge water
through the drain plug located on the
bottom of the prefilter.

CAUTION NOTE

If water is not discharged from the prefilter, it can result in serious damage If the lamps are not blinking, check the fuse and bulbs, and if any defect is
found, replace it with a new one.
on the whole fuel system.

NOTE
Shift lever range HI indicator (Green)
If the turn signal lamp blinks faster than normal, the bulb for the turn signal
The indicator comes on when the lamp may be blown. Replace it with a new bulb with specified capacities.
shift lever is put in the HI (5th, 6th,
7th and 8th speed) range.
WARNING
The turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp are vital for vehicle driving.
Make sure to check them frequently and replace any blown bulb with a
new one to prevent a possible accident.
Splitter indicator (Green: vehicle with ZF
transmission)
This indicator comes on when the
Hi-LO switch on the shift lever knob
T/M is set to the HI position.
SPLIT

5 - 16
 Monochrome LCD display (for vehicle with electronic engine)
The CPU receives signals from sensors and Monochrome-LCD display screen (not through main menu screen)
switches and displays various information
with gauges and warning lamps as well as
diagnosis and driving information on the
monochrome-LCD display on the instrument
cluster.

NOTE
On the monochrome-LCD display, the fuel
consumption information is updated for every
0.5 l based on the driving distance. This does (1) It is the initial screen for the (3) Once the check warning lamp goes

not indicate the average fuel consumption. At
each consumption of 0.5 l of fuel, the fuel con-
sumption changes. The lower the engine load,
the more the fuel efficiency will be improved.
monochrome-LCD display. When the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, it disappears after the
system check.
5. Instrument cluster
off after the ignition switch is initially
turned to the ON position, this screen
is displayed on the monochrome-LCD
display (automatic transmission).

NOTE
The monochrome-LCD display description for
the automatic transmission is based on the ZF
automatic transmission.

(2) Once the check warning lamp goes
off after the ignition switch is initially
turned to the ON position, this screen
is displayed on the monochrome-LCD
display (manual transmission).
(4) When the cruise control function is
activated while driving (manual
transmission)

5 - 17
(5) When the cruise function is activated
while driving (automatic transmission)
(7) When the warning lamp comes on
while driving (automatic transmission)
(9) Informing the driver of the maintenance
interval after setting up the maintenance
interval (automatic transmission)
▶ This screen is shown only when the
driver uses the maintenance interval
setup.

(6) When the warning lamp comes on
while driving (manual transmission)
(8) Informing the driver of the maintenance
interval after setting up the maintenance
interval (manual transmission)
▶ This screen is shown only when
the driver uses the maintenance
interval setup.

5 - 18
(10) How to enter various gauge screens from initial monochrome-LCD display screen (manual transmission)
: The gauge screen will change if the ENTER switch is pressed for about 0.5 to 1 second or more.

ENTER ENTER

→ →

5. Instrument cluster
Instantaneous fuel consumption Aqueous urea level
Eco driving Engine load ratio : DL06K (Doosan) and F4AE3681 (IVECO) engines

(11) How to enter various gauge screens from initial monochrome-LCD display screen (automatic transmission)
: The gauge screen will change if the ENTER switch is pressed for about 0.5 to 1 second or more.

ENTER ENTER

→ →

Eco driving Instantaneous fuel consumption For automatic transmission Aqueous urea level
single number : DL06K (Doosan) and F4AE3681
Engine load ratio (IVECO) engines

5 - 19
(12) Description for each screen

The cruise control-related The cruise control-related

speed is displayed for manual speed is displayed for
transmission automatic transmission

Service interval alarm reset:

The warning lamp is If the service interval is up,
displayed when any the message “Engine oil change”
warning case occurs is displayed.

5 - 20
 Switching monochrome-LCD display screen to main menu screen
(Example Screen)
▶ This describes how to change the display from
the initial screen to the main menu screen so as
MODE to perform diagnosis or change Configuration.
▶ The display will change to the main menu screen
only when the MODE switch is pressed about 0.5
to 1 second or longer.
▶ Press the ENTER switch on the desired item to
ESC
check the corresponding information. Pressing
the ESC switch returns to the previous screen.

Main Menu Item Function

1. Brightness · Displaying brightness level of LCD display screen · The screen brightness can be adjusted and the trip information can
· Setting driving duration and engine running time be checked.

5. Instrument cluster
2. Engine operation information
· Engine related information · No data exists unless the engine sends them.

· If the idling time exceeds the predefined time (set by 30 seconds), the
1. Configuration
3. Setting engine idling alarm · Setting time for engine idling alarm
alarm is activated.
4. Selecting language · Switching between Korean and English · The language can be selected between Korean and English.
1. Engine oil change · Setting engine oil change interval
2. Transmission fluid change · Setting transmission fluid change interval · Change intervals for various oil and fluids that need regular change
2. Setting service
can be set
interval 3. Coolant change · Setting coolant change interval (set by 2,000 km)
4. Axle oil change · Setting axle oil change interval
1. ECU · Displaying engine diagnosis information
2. ABS/EBS · Displaying ABS/EBS diagnosis information
3. AUTO T/M ECU · Displaying automatic transmission diagnosis information
3. Diagnosis · Diagnosis information for each vehicle system can be checked.
4. Retarder ECU · Displaying retarder diagnosis information
5. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER · Displaying instrument cluster diagnosis information
6. ECAS · Displaying ECAS diagnosis information
1. Engine oil pressure · Checking engine oil pressure information
2. Battery voltage · Checking battery voltage information · It shows information on the engine oil pressure, battery voltage and
4. Gauge
axial load.
information 3. Axial load information (ECAS vehicle) · Checking axial load information (for ECAS vehicles)
4. Brake lining (EBS vehicle) · Checking brake lining wear on EBS vehicle
· Setting MIN value for green zone · The fuel consumption per hour in normal driving condition (green zone)
· Setting MAX value for green zone
5. ECO setting 1. Setting ECO (Green) zone
can be set.

※ The main menu (and items) on the monochrome-LCD display screen may differ by vehicle specifications.

5 - 21
Configuration screen
▶ This explains how to adjust the brightness of the monochrome-LCD display.

ENTER

ESC

- The range of the brightness is set to 90% during the day and between 35% and 50% at night.
(Use the brightness control switch located on the left of the driver’s seat)

5 - 22
Service interval setup screen

▶ If you want to set the service interval, select the item on the service interval setup screen and press ENTER . Then, set the
replacement interval for each of the following items.
▶ If you do not want to set the service interval, press the ESC switch.
(1) When setting service interval
1) Move the cursor to the desired item using the PG▲ (Page Up) and PG▼ (Page Down) switches, and press the
ENTER switch. Then, use the PG▲ (Page Up ) and PG▼ (Page Down) switches to the desired replacement interval in km (by
2,000 km) and press the ENTER switch.
2) When the driving distance reaches the preset distance for oil change, the message “Change engine oil” is displayed on the
display after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

5. Instrument cluster
ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

set by 2,000 km

5 - 23
 (2) Service interval alarm and resetting
1) Once the vehicle mileage reaches the distance set by the service interval, the message “Change engine oil” will be displayed on the screen.
2) Press the MODE switch to switch to the main menu screen.
3) Move the cursor to the desired item using the PG▲ (Page Up) and PG▼ (Page Down) switches, and press the ENTER switch. Then, use
the PG▲ (Page Up) and PG▼ (Page Down) switches to the desired replacement interval in km (by 2,000 km) and press the
ENTER switch.

ESC MODE

ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

5 - 24
Diagnosis screen (Showing current errors only)
▶ When the warning lamp for the engine, ABS/EBS, automatic transmission, retarder, instrument cluster or ECAS is displayed on the
driving screen, select the corresponding item on the diagnosis menu screen and press ENTER to check the error code for each item.

MODE

ESC

5. Instrument cluster
Error code
generated ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER

Normal

5 - 25
Gauge information screen
▶ This screen shows information on the engine oil pressure, battery voltage, axial load (ECAS vehicle) and brake lining (EBS vehicle).

ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

ENTER ENTER

ESC ESC

5 - 26
ECO driving setup screen
(1) This screen allows you to set the fuel consumption per hour during a normal driving condition (green zone).
1) Press the MODE switch to switch to the main menu screen.
2) Select the “MIN” and “MAX” values using the PG▲ (Page Up) and PG▼ (Page Down) switches and press ENTER .

MODE ENTER

ESC ESC

5. Instrument cluster
(2) Eco driving

White zone Green zone Red zone

1) Eco driving indicates a zone for economic driving and promotes fuel-efficient driving.
2) Eco driving shows the amount of fuel consumed by the engine (fuel consumption per hour l/hr) in a bar graph and color so as
to help the driver achieve fuel-efficient driving.
① White: Superior fuel efficiency ② Green: Normal fuel efficiency ③ Red: Poor fuel efficiency
3) The green zone on the Eco driving can be set on the main menu screen.
- The default settings are 7 I/hr for the MIN value and 20 I/hr for the MAX value for the green zone.
- The fuel efficiency depends on the driver’s driving style, and the optimal fuel-efficiency zone can be displayed by adjusting the
MIN/MAX values with the above procedure.

5 - 27
Allison automatic transmission monochrome-LCD display
(1) Once the check warning lamp goes off
after the ignition switch is initially turned
to the ON position, this screen is displayed
on the monochrome-LCD display,
indicating the Neutral state.
- “N” will be shown after automatic
system inspection.
5 - 28
(2) This screen shows the automatic (3) This shows reverse driving showing that
the reverse gear is engaged.
mode and 3rd gear.
(4) This screen shows the warning lamp
mode.
1) Transmission range inhibitor
warning lamp
- It comes on when gear shifting
is disabled.
2) Automatic transmission check
warning lamp
- If on, this lamp indicates a fault
with the automatic
transmission.
3) Automatic transmission oil
temperature warning lamp
- This warning lamp is illuminated
and the ECU inhibits operation
at a high shift gear when the
temperature of the oil in the
automatic transmission oil tank
reaches 121℃ (250℉).
 ZF automatic transmission monochrome-LCD display

(1) Once the check warning lamp goes off (3) “RM” indicates the low-speed reversing (5) This screen shows the manual mode
after the initial ignition switch is turned mode. and 3rd manual gear. If the low gear
“ON”, this screen is displayed on the

5. Instrument cluster
(Reverse Low) value is 3, the above screen is displayed.
monochrome LCD display, indicating the If the currently engaged gear and the
Neutral state.
low gear value are the same, only the
- “N” will be shown after automatic
gear will be displayed.
system inspection.

(2) “DM” indicates the low-speed forward (4) This screen shows the automatic mode (6) This screen shows the manual mode
driving mode (forward 1st gear). and 6th gear. and the current manual gear is the 3rd
gear. If the low gear is set to 2nd, the
display is shown as above.

5 - 29
(7) This screen shows the manual mode
and the current manual gear is the 6th
gear. If the low gear is set to 4th, the
display is shown as above.

(8) This screen shows the warning lamp mode.

1) Spanner & STOP: Immediate service is required.
2) Spanner: System error. Inspection and repair are necessary. (high transmission
fluid temperature included)
3) CW: Worn clutch → It indicates the clutch replacement timing.
4) CL : Clutch problem → It indicates overloaded clutch.
5) AL: Insufficient air → If air is insufficient, the neutral gear state can be maintained.

NOTE
· If a warning state occurs while the vehicle is at a stop or while driving, the warning mode screen
and the current gear setting screen will be alternately displayed at intervals of 2 seconds.
· If the spanner symbol disappears after stopping the engine, waiting for approx. 5 seconds and
starting it again, the system is correctly recovered and can be used again.

55 -- 30
30
55 -- 31
31
MEMO

5. Instrument cluster
MEMO

5 - 32
6. Switches
Chapter 1
Switches................................................................. 6-2 ASR ON/OFF switch.............................................. 6-4 Chapter 2

Work lamp switch (premium)................................ 6-2 Steering wheel control switch............................. 6-4 Chapter 3

Outside rearview mirror defogger switch............ 6-2 Hill holder switch* ................................................ 6-5 Chapter 4

Chapter 5
Fuel preheat switch............................................... 6-3 Focus lamp switch ............................................... 6-5
Chapter 6
Cab tilt release switch.......................................... 6-3 Room lamp switch................................................ 6-5
Chapter 7
PTO switch (premium).......................................... 6-3
Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Switches
NOTE
• Switch: Pressing it once activates the corresponding function. Pressing it once again stops the function. Also when the lamp switch is on the first or second stage
at night, the symbol bulb comes on.
• The selection of switches is different by the specifications for the B5.9 vehicle.

Work lamp switch (Premium) Outside rearview mirror defogger switch

This switch is used to help work at Press the switch to remove moist
night. When the work lamp switch or frost on the outside rearview
is pressed to the ON position, the mirrors by the defogger installed
work lamps and the corresponding in the mirrors. Once the switch
indicator come on. is pressed, the defogger works
for 15 minutes, and the switch is
automatically turned “OFF”
without being locked.

CAUTION CAUTION

The work lamps can come on by pressing the switch only when the vehicle Activating the outside rearview mirror defogger continuously without
is at a stop or driven at 20 km/h or lower. Pressing the switch again turns starting the engine may discharge the battery. Make sure to use this
function after starting the engine.
off the work lamps. If the driving speed exceeds 20 km/h with the
work lamps ON, the work lamps automatically go off. However,
the above conditions will not apply when driving backwards. WARNING
If the defogger is damaged and the rear view is not clear, accidents
may occur.

6 -2
Fuel preheat switch
If fuel is frozen in winter, press
this switch to preheat the fuel filter.
When the switch is operated, the
fuel filter preheat operation is
automatically performed for 15
minutes and the switch is
automatically returned to the
OFF position.
PTO switch (Premium)
To activate the PTO, press this
switch. The corresponding
indicator on the instrument
cluster will come on, and while
the PTO is in operation, the
alarm will continuously sound.

CAUTION CAUTION
 ctivating the fuel preheat function continuously without starting the
A

6. Switches
Before pressing the switch, stop the vehicle and depress the clutch
engine may discharge the battery. Make sure to use this function after
pedal fully.
starting the engine.

Cab tilt release switch

When tilting the cab, press this
switch first to release the lock, and
then raise the cab using the switch
on the outside of the vehicle.
While the switch is pressed, the
cab tilt warning lamp on the
instrument cluster will come on
and the alarm will keep sounding.

CAUTION
Before driving, make sure to press the cab tilt release switch again to turn it
“OFF” and check that the warning lamp on the instrument cluster goes off.

6 -3
ASR ON/OFF switch Steering wheel control switch
When tire slip occurs as the Press the steering wheel control
vehicle attempts to get away from switch to control the angle and
a road with poor conditions, the height of the steering wheel for
ASR
ASR function will be automatically comfortable driving.
activated. The ASR function
reduces the engine power for
excessive slip. When operating
this switch under this condition, the
engine power is maintained and
the ASR function is deactivated
to escape a road under a poor
CAUTION
condition.
· After pressing the switch (under the left vent), the angle and height of the
steering wheel can be controlled for about seven seconds.
· If the vehicle air pressure is below 6 bar, the angle and height of the steer-
ing wheel may not be adjusted as properly.

6 -4
Hill holder switch*
When the driver presses the hill
holder switch on a slope, braking
force same as the normal braking
will be applied when the braking
pedal is depressed. When
Room lamp switch
Press the room lamp switch to
turn the indoor light on and
press it again to turn it off.
ROOM (fluorescent bulb built-in)

depressing the accelerator pedal,

the vehicle can start without
being rolled back.

NOTE

6. Switches
Focus lamp switch The room lamp will come on regardless of the ignition switch position.

Press the focus lamp switch to

turn on the focus lamp with the
doors closed.

NOTE
The focus lamp is operated regardless of the ignition switch position. It
is automatically illuminated when the door is opened.

6 -5
MEMO

6 -6
7. Transmission and Brake System
Chapter 1

Manual transmission..................................... 7-2 Chapter 2

Chapter 3
Automatic transmission*.............................. 7-4
Chapter 4
ZF Automatic Transmission......................... 7-5
Chapter 5
Allison Automatic Transmission................ 7-12
Chapter 6
Brake System............................................... 7-15 Chapter 7

Parking brake.............................................. 7-18 Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Manual transmission
How to use manual transmission
To shift a gear, depress the clutch pedal fully, move the shift lever
to the desired position and release the clutch pedal slowly.
Also, make sure to stop the vehicle completely before shifting to
the 1st or reverse gear.
CAUTION
· Secure the rear and side areas before driving backward.
· To shift to the R (Reverse) position, stop the vehicle completely and
wait for approx. 3 seconds in the Neutral position before shifting to the
R position.
· If placing your foot on to the clutch pedal during driving, the clutch disc
can be worn.
· When downshifting, be cautious not to let the engine RPM enter the
red zone indicated on the tachometer at the lower gear.
· If depressing the clutch pedal only half down to stop the vehicle on a
slope, the clutch can be prematurely damaged.
7 -2
CAUTION
· Shifting gears at proper timing can enhance smooth driving and reduce
fuel consumption.
· Make sure that the needle on the speedometer does not go over the
red zone. Letting so can damage the engine.
CAUTION
· Make sure to apply the parking brake when stopping or parking on a
slope to prevent an accident. To start off on an uphill road, select the
1st gear, depress the accelerator pedal (rev up the engine up to 2,000
rpm) and release the clutch pedal completely. When the vehicle is about
to move, release the parking brake to start off.
· In a cold weather, gear shifting operation may not be performed smoothly.
This is normal as oil is not warmed up sufficiently.
· If you find it difficult to shift to the 1st gear or reverse gear with the
vehicle stationary, place the shift lever to the neutral position, release
and depress back the clutch pedal, and try moving the shift lever to the
1st gear or reverse driving position.
· Do not place the hand on the shift lever while driving unless you do so
to change the gear. It can wear the parts in the transmission.
WARNING
· Before leaving the vehicle, park the vehicle on level ground, pull up the
parking brake lever completely to engage the parking brake, and set
the ignition switch in the OFF position.
· Place the shift lever in the 1st or R (reverse) gear position. Otherwise,
the vehicle may move unexpectedly, leading to an accident.
6-speed manual transmission 9-speed manual transmission (ZF9S1110TO)
(ZF6S1000TO, T110S6 & T8S6)

ZF6S1000TO & T110S6

1 3 5 5 7
N
C 1 3
R 2 4 6

HIGH
LOW
N

7. Transmission and Braking System

T8S6 R 2 4
6 8
R 2 4 6

1 3 5

● Range switch
CAUTION
To shift to the 1st or R (Reverse) ( ) gear, stop the vehicle and wait for
approx. 3 seconds. If trying shifting to these gears during driving, gear
shift may not be performed or the transmission can be damaged.
1. When the range switch is set in the LOW position, the R, C,
1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears can be selected. When the range
shift is set in the HIGH position, the 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th
gears can be selected.
2. Shifting between H (High) range and L (Low) range
Example: shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear
(1) Set the range switch in the H (High) or L (Low) position.
(2) With the clutch pedal depressed, move the shift lever
between the 4th and 5th gear positions (through the
neutral position).
(3) Shifting from the 5th gear to the 4th gear is only possible with
the driving speed below a certain limit to prevent overrun.
(4) When the range switch is set in the H (High) position, the
HI range indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster is
illuminated.

7 -3
Automatic transmission*
3. To shift to the R or C position, the range switch should be set How to use automatic transmission
in the LOW position with the engine switch in the ON position
or the engine running.

NOTE
The position “C” on the ZF9S1110TO transmission can be used instead
of the 1st gear position to obtain power in order to start off on a slope
under a heavily loaded condition.

CAUTION
· To shift to the 1st or R (Reverse) ( ) gear, stop the vehicle and wait
for approx. 3 seconds. If trying shifting to these gears during driving,
gear shift may not be performed or the transmission can be damaged.
· For reverse driving on ZF transmission:
Make sure to select the LOW range (lower position) with the switch < ZF - Automatic Transmission >
before shifting to the R position. If shifting to the R position with the
HIGH range selected, abrupt acceleration can lead to an accident. (1) When the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow
· The switch cannot be set to the LOW position when the driving speed
While depressing the accelerator pedal slowly, move the
is over 30 km/h.
shift lever between D and R repeatedly to pull the vehicle
out with elastic force.
WARNING
If shifting from the 4th gear to the 5th gear without moving the range WARNING
switch to the HIGH position, the transmission is shifted to the 1st gear,
leading to damage of engine internal parts and transmission. Before pulling out the vehicle from snow, mud or sand, check if there are
any obstacles or people around the vehicle. While the vehicle is moving,
it may spring forward or backward suddenly, causing accidents.

NOTE
If the vehicle cannot be pulled out, get help from other vehicles.

7 -4
 ZF Automatic Transmission
How to use ZF automatic transmission

7. Transmission and Braking System

< Rotary switch >

< Allison Automatic Transmission > < Tip lever >

(2) Engine brake (1) Console controller (Range Selector)

If using the engine brake on a downhill road, the brake can The controller consists of the “Tip Lever” and “Rotary
be a longer service life. To use the engine brake, move the Switch.”
shift lever to the 2nd or 1st position.
1) Tip lever
NOTE The tip lever is used to select the gear or change the
Moving the shift lever to the 1st position at a high speed to use the
operation mode. It can be used to shift gears in the
engine brake can put stress on the transmission. Move the shift lever to manual mode.
the 2nd position and wait till the driving speed drops before moving the
lever to the 1st position.

(3) For stopping and parking

Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely.
Then, set the shift button in the N position and pull the
parking brake lever.

7 -5
 Downshifting by
Upshifting by two gears
two gears
Automatic Rotary switch
and manual
operation
2nd selection
Tip lever switch
Upshifting by
one gear
1st
Tip lever

Downshifting by
one gear

< Rotary switch >

2) Rotary switch
< Tip lever >
The rotary switch can be used to select the driving direction
of the vehicle.
D : Forward
N : Neutral
R : Reverse

7 -6
 7. Transmission and Braking System
< Monochrome-LCD display screen > < Monochrome-LCD display screen >

(2) Instrument cluster (display) 2) Manual mode

The display shows the currently selected gear, the neutral ① 3: This indicates that the 3rd gear is engaged in the
location, the possibility of downshifting, and error manual mode.
description.
1) Automatic mode
① Five bars and two triangles are displayed to indicate
the gear and upshifting/downshifting.
- The transmission is in the automatic mode.
② 6: This indicates that the 6th gear is engaged in the
automatic mode.

7 -7
 Driving guideline

< Monochrome-LCD display screen > < Monochrome-LCD display screen > < Rotary switch >

② Each bar indicates the possible shifting gear. (1) Starting engine
③ The triangle below the bars indicates the possibility of 1) Apply the parking brake.
downshifting. 2) Turn the rotary switch to the “N” position.
④ As the transmission is currently engaged with the 3rd gear 3) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
and there is one bar in the graph, it shows that downshifting 4) Start and run the engine.
to the 2nd gear (recommended gear) is possible.

NOTE
Driving with the recommended gear in the manual mode can improve
the fuel consumption.

7 -8
 Downshifting
by two gears

7. Transmission and Braking System

Downshifting by
one gear
< Monochrome-LCD display screen > < Rotary switch > < Monochrome-LCD display screen >
<Tip lever>

(2) Preparing for forward driving (3) Selecting starting gear manually
1) Start the engine. The automatically selected starting gear can be changed
2) Turn the rotary switch from the “N” position manually.
3) To the “D” position. Method: When pulling down the tip lever, the possible
starting gear is displayed on the display.
4) Enter the automatic mode.
5) The starting gear is automatically selected and
displayed on the instrument cluster (ex: the automatic
4th gear).
6) Release the parking brake and depress the accelerator
pedal to start the vehicle.

7 -9
 Automatic
and manual
operation
selection
switch

< Monochrome-LCD display screen >

(4) Switching between automatic mode and manual mode while
driving
Press the automatic and manual operation selection switch
located on the side of the tip lever to switch between the
automatic and manual modes.
(5) Gear shifting
· Gear shifting in automatic mode
In the automatic mode, gear shifting is made automatically,
and the current gear is displayed on the instrument cluster.

7 - 10

< Monochrome-LCD display screen > < Rotary switch >
(6) Backing up
1) Stop the vehicle completely.
2) Turn the rotary switch to the “R” position.
3) Confirm that “R1” is displayed on the display.
4) Depress the accelerator pedal and release the parking
brake at the same time.
5) Then, the vehicle will back up.
· Switching driving direction
Turn the rotary switch from the “R” position to the “D”
position or vice versa.
CAUTION
● Take caution that the engine may be turned off in the following cases:
- Depressing both the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the
same time
- When experiencing excessive roll-back while attempting to start the
overloaded vehicle on an uphill road
- When making a sudden stop (vehicle stopped within 0.3 seconds)
● The vehicle equipped with the ZF automatic transmission requires
the learning time for calculating the vehicle weight for proper shifting
7. Transmission and Braking System
operation based on the driving situations.
- During the learning mode, the gear may be shifted continuously
by one gear.
- When starting off, an inappropriate gear may be selected.
● The vehicle with the ZF automatic transmission starts with the 2nd gear
(unloaded) or the 1st gear (loaded). However, the 1st gear is selected
for the starting gear after the engine is initially started. (When turning
the rotary switch from the “N” position to the “D” position)
- Depending on changes in the vehicle loading condition, a different
gear may be selected.
- Depending on the vehicle load condition and road condition, select
an appropriate gear in the manual mode to start off.
● To prevent clutch wear on a slope or unpaved road, downshift (to the
1st or 2nd gear) to start off.
CAUTION
● While the exhaust brake is in use, downshifting may be performed
automatically to increase braking power. Also, using the foot brake with
the exhaust brake can increase the shifting RPM. (To obtain higher
braking force, shift gears manually.)
● When automatic downshifting is needed for acceleration for passing another
vehicle, release the accelerator pedal completely and depress it to the end.
● When starting off on a slope, the vehicle can roll down. Therefore, depress
the accelerator pedal with the brake pedal depressed fully. (If the vehicle is
heavily loaded or is on a steep slope, utilize the parking brake properly.)
7 - 11
Allison Automatic Transmission
How to use Allison automatic transmission
NOTE
The transmission has a hold function that inhibits upshifting over the
selected range. However, if the engine speed is more than the allowable
maximum rpm while driving downhill, upshifting is automatically performed
to protect the engine.

< Allison Automatic Transmission >

CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle (even for a moment) while the engine is run-
ning, make sure that the transmission is set in the “N” state, the parking
brake is applied and accurately engaged, and the wheels are chocked.
If you do not follow them, the vehicle may move suddenly.

CAUTION
When driving downhill, the transmission may be damaged if the gear is
disengaged. Also, in the Neutral state, speed reduction by the exhaust
brake or Jake brake is not possible.

7 - 12
How to use Allison automatic transmission
on slope
Highest possible gear
Currently engaged gear

Mode shift switch

7. Transmission and Braking System

How to select manual
driving mode
Select the desired gear
among the 3rd, 2nd and
1st gears and drive at
full force with the
selected gear.
<Allison Automatic Transmission>
• The mode shift switch can be used for more powerful driving. It
should be used only under a certain situation, such as when driving
For the Allison 6-speed automatic transmission, select the manual on a slope with loads. Using this on level ground can increase fuel
mode if you cannot obtain enough power to move on a slope. consumption.
• When the mode shift switch is pressed, the red lamp comes on,
indicating that the power mode is activated.
• When driving up a steep uphill road, push the “ ” button to select
the lower gear. Then, the mode is shifted to the manual mode,
allowing powerful driving. If the 3rd-2nd gear is not powerful
enough, press the “ ” button additionally to shift to the 1st gear.
CAUTION
• If there is any problem while driving, the red lamp may come on. In this
case, have your vehicle checked by your workshop immediately.
• Using the power mode to use more power on a slope excessively can
result in poor fuel consumption. Instead, use the manual driving mode
for powerful driving and good fuel consumption.

7 - 13
Transmission selection range

Transmission
Description
selection range
Before shifting from the “D” position to the “R” or vice versa, the vehicle should be completely sta-
R tionary. Once the “R” gear is engaged, the selection indicator will display “R.”

If checking vehicle accessories with the engine idling for an extended period of time, set the trans-
mission in the Neutral state. If working normally, the transmission is set to “N” by the ECU while the
N engine is being started. It occurs automatically at the push button selector. The N (Neutral) position
is also used when the power takeoff is continuously in operation (for vehicles with PTO). The selec-
tion indicator shows “N.”

When “D” is selected, the transmission is shifted to the 1st gear. Also, as the speed increases, the
D transmission upshifts automatically in the current range. As the speed decreases, the transmission
downshifts automatically. The selection indicator shows the possible highest range.

6 Sometimes it is recommended to use only low gears depending on the road conditions, load or traffic
5 conditions. These gear positions also make the engine braking increase gradually as the slope is
4 lowered. (The braking effect increases with lower gears.)
3 Use the arrow buttons for the push button selector. To acquire the desired gear, use the Up (↓) and
2
1 Down (↑) arrow keys. The selection indicator shows the selected gear.

Use this range when driving on a muddy road or with heavy snow, passing through a narrow path or
1 going uphill or downhill. At a lower gear, the vehicle has the maximum driving force and maximum
engine braking force. Select the first gear by pressing the down (↓) button on the push button selector.

7 - 14
 Brake System
Accelerator pedal Brake pedal

7. Transmission and Braking System

To prevent unnecessary fuel consumption, check it for correct
operation regularly.
This vehicle equipped with the front and rear brake systems
(drum type), and two brake pneumatic lines form an independent
circuit.
If one brake pneumatic line is defective, the other line still
functions normally. However, in this case, the brake pedal should
be depressed further with more power than usual. Also, the
braking distance becomes longer.

NOTE
The ABS may operate also when you depress the brake pedal softly on
speed bumps or an unpaved road. This is due to the speed difference
of each wheel based on the road surface conditions and is a normal
phenomenon.

7 - 15
 WARNING
· The brake valve is integrated with two seal rings to maintain two inde-
pendent circuits. If one of these seal rings is damaged, pressure in the
air tank is decreased so the air pressure warning lamp comes on and
the warning buzzer sounds. In this case, contact a nearby DAEWOO
service center and have your vehicle checked immediately. If you
continue to drive with the warning lamp on, accidents may occur.
· Even if pressure in the air tank drops to 0 during driving, the parking
brake is not automatically applied. Operate the hand brake gradually
to stop the vehicle and have the vehicle checked.
· If the brake pedal is depressed deeper or feels heavier, have the brake
system checked by your workshop immediately. If you continue to drive
with such symptoms, accidents may occur.
· If driving with the brake pedal depressed, the brake and ABS cannot
function properly and the brake parts can be worn abnormally. Also,
the brake lamps are kept illuminated, obstructing other drivers behind.
· When driving on a long downhill road, using the brake repeatedly will
degrade the braking performance due to overheating of the drum,
resulting in possible accidents. Whenever possible, use the exhaust
brake or engine brake.
7 - 16
CAUTION
· When cleaning or washing the area around the tires, be careful not to
damage the parts and wirings for the ABS.
· If any brake friction material (pad or lining) is replaced, the vehicle may
not be able to use full braking force. Avoid abrupt braking and drive with
care for initial 100 km
· When driving on a wet road or after washing, the braking force may
be degraded as the relevant components become wet. In this case,
check the braking performance by depressing the brake pedal softly
for several times while driving at a low speed before driving normally.
· If the brake lining reaches the wear limit, an abnormal noise may be
heard while driving or applying the brake. If you hear abnormal noise,
have your vehicle checked immediately and, if necessary, replace the
brake lining.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Clutch pedal
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly or the brake is used on
a slippery road, the friction between the road surface and the tires
becomes smaller than the braking force, which makes the wheels
locked, leading to the vehicle skidding.
To prevent such phenomena, the ABS repeatedly engages and
disengages the brake instantaneously to maintain the vehicle's
braking force while allowing the vehicle operation by the steering
wheel.

7. Transmission and Braking System

NOTE
 ven if the ABS is not operating normally due to defects, it will operate
E
in the same way as the normal brake.

CAUTION
Even a vehicle with the ABS needs a similar braking distance to a vehicle
with the normal braking system. Therefore, maintain the sufficient safe
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
When shifting, engage the gear with the clutch pedal depressed
all the way.
CAUTION
Driving with half-clutch unnecessarily will cause the clutch to wear earlier.
Other than shifting, do not step on the clutch pedal.

7 - 17
Parking brake
Parking brake lever Operating parking brake lever in each position

① Driving position

Knob locking
lever

② Emergency
brake position

Knob ③ Parking position

Lowering the knob will apply the parking brake and the parking
brake indicator will illuminate.
When leaving from the vehicle, make sure to push the knob down
until you hear a “click”, which indicates the locking is complete. To
release the parking brake, lift up the knob locking lever and raise
the knob.
1) Driving position
When the lever is located on the front-most position ①, the
parking brake is released.
2) Emergency brake position
If you lower the lever from the position ① to the position ②,
the parking brake of the truck will gradually be applied. This
is an emergency brake and can be used to reduce the speed.
When using the emergency brake, the parking brake warning
lamp and the brake lamp come on.
If you releases the lever at the position ②, the lever will
automatically return to the position ①, and the parking brake
on the truck will be released.

7 - 18
3) Parking position
If you push the lever from the position ② to the position ③,
the parking brake on the truck will be applied. If the knob
locking lever is unlocked and pushed up, the parking brake
will be released.

WARNING

7. Transmission and Braking System

After starting the engine and before starting the vehicle, make sure to
place the parking brake lever back to its original position. Also, start the
vehicle after checking that the parking lamp goes off. If you drive the ve-
hicle with the parking brake lever lowered, the brake lining may be seized
or the drum may overheat, causing unpredicted accidents.

WARNING
If the parking brake is not fully applied, the vehicle may move, causing
unpredicted accidents.

WARNING
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. While the parking brake
cannot be released without certain operation, the vehicle may move if it is
parked on a slope, causing unpredicted accidents. Such accidents may be
prevented by shifting to the 1st or to “R” after applying the parking brake
with the engine off, and by chocking the wheels with wooden support.

7 - 19
MEMO

7 - 20
MEMO

7 - 21
MEMO

7 - 22
8. Heater and A/C
Chapter 1

Heater and A/C System................................. 8-2 Chapter 2

Chapter 3
Heater and A/C Vent...................................... 8-3
Chapter 4
Heater and A/C controls................................ 8-4
Chapter 5

Automatic A/C*.............................................. 8-5 Chapter 6

Chapter 7
Manual heater and A/C.................................. 8-8
Chapter 8
Auxiliary heater (behind driver's seat)*...... 8-14
Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Heater and A/C System

Manual heater and Automatic heater and

A/C system A/C system

8 -2
 Heater and A/C Vent
The air in the cabin or fresh air is delivered directly into the cab, and the blowing speed and air distribution can be controlled as desired.

Center air vent Side air vent

Air Distribution
Air distribution control lever
control lever

8. Heater and A/C

Open Blower speed
Close
Blower speed control lever
control lever
Close Open

Control the air distribution by moving the air distribution control lever on the air vent up or down, and left or right. Open or close the air
vent by moving the blower speed control lever left or right.

8 -3
Heater and A/C controls
CAUTION
· When driving on a long uphill road, turn on or off the A/C every three
to five minutes.
· Even in winter when the A/C is not used, turn it on once or twice per
month to prevent refrigerant leakage and to maintain the smooth oil
circulation in the compressor and the optimal operation of the A/C.
· When driving in an area with lots of dirt or hazardous air, place the air
source selector to to prevent hazardous air inflow. However, after
leaving the area, place it to to supply fresh air into the cab.
· Since the air used for the heater or the A/C flows into the cab through
the front grill of the windshield, make sure that leaves, snow or other
foreign materials do not block the grill.
WARNING
As A/C refrigerant is under high pressure, only qualified service technician
should handle it. Improper service can lead to an injury.
CAUTION
· Steam cleaning may increase the refrigerant pressure and damage
the refrigerant piping.
· Take caution with electric devices when wet cleaning.
· A small amount of gas leak can be detected only with a gas leak tester.
Have your system checked by a nearest authorized workshop.

● Checking air filter

· The air filter is installed on the air inlet of the blower unit. If any WARNING
dirt or foreign material is stuck to it, the blowing speed and
cooling efficiency can be degraded. Also, the low-pressure Sleeping in the cab while the vehicle is parked and the A/C or heater is
on may lead to death.
switch may be operated under this condition. Make sure to
check and replace it at the specified interval.
· Replacement interval: every 10,000 km
· If driven in a highly polluted area or on an unpaved road for an
extended period of time: check and replace it frequently
● Checking condenser
If foreign materials are attached to the condenser fins, their heat
exchange efficiency is degraded, decreasing the cooling
performance. Also, the low-pressure switch may be operated under
this condition. Make sure to clean the condenser fin with compressed
air and clean water and flatten any bent fin at every 3 months.
● Checking A/C refrigerant amount
Insufficient refrigerant leads to poor A/C performance. Overcharging
will also affect the A/C. If any defect is found, contact a nearby
DAEWOO service center and have your vehicle checked.

8 -4
 Automatic A/C*
How to use automatic A/C

Recirculation
indicator
Air distribution
indicator
Blower speed
Fresh air indicator A/C operation control dial
Temperature indicator
control dial Auto-control
Ambient air indicator Defroster indicator A/C button
temperature button Blower indicator Fresh air temperature
indicator

8. Heater and A/C

OUTSIDE

AUTO switch Defroster button

Air source selection (Defogger)
button Mode button OFF button
(Air distribution
button) Temperature (fresh air
temperature, set temperature)

8 -5
Press the AUTO button and select the desired temperature. Then,
the A/C system automatically performs heating and cooling
operation to maintain the selected temperature.
· During cooling operation, the engine idling speed is
increased for approx. 200 rpm.
· Do not place any object on the sun, in-car temperature and
ambient temperature sensors. It may cause defects.
· When the ignition is cycled OFF, the set temperature and the
button settings are stored. However, if disconnecting the
battery, the memory is erased. Once the battery is connected
again, the temperature is set to 25°C as default.
· As fresh air flows into the cooler, it appears like fog. This is
due to the intrusion of moist air caused by rapid cooling.
① Functions
● AUTO button
Used to set the A/C to the automatic mode.
● Temperature control dial
By turning the temperature control dial, you can control the
set temperature and the blowing air temperature.
● OFF button
- The A/C will stop operating.
● AMB button
- If you press this button, “OUTSIDE” will be displayed on
the LCD, and the ambient air temperature will be
displayed for about five seconds.
- the ambient air temperature displayed on the LCD may
differ from the actual temperature outside due to
surrounding conditions.
● Air source selector
If you press this button, the air source mode is selected
between the recirculation mode and fresh air mode, and
the corresponding indicator will come on.
8 -6
If the left indicator illuminates on the LCD,
fresh air will be drown into the passenger's
side. The moisture on the window and the
cigarette smoke can be reduced.
If the left indicator illuminates on the LCD, the
air will be recirculated in the cab. Use this
function when driving on a dusty road or
cooling or heating rapidly.
WARNING
If you drive for a long time with the fresh air blocked, the glasses will
become foggy and the quality of the interior air will be stuffy, obstructing
safe driving.
● Blower speed control dial
Turn the blower speed control dial to adjust the amount of
blowing air. In the AUTO mode, the amount of blowing air
can be controlled by the blower speed control dial.
However, the AUTO indicator will disappear from the LCD
and the A/C system will change to the manual mode.
CAUTION
When setting the temperature, turn the blower speed control dial “ON”,
and press the A/C button.
● [A/C] button
When pressing the A/C button, will show up on the LCD.
In the AUTO mode, AUTO will disappear from the display
and the A/C will operate. If pressing the A/C button again,
will disappear from the LCD and the A/C will stop.
● Mode selection button
Select the mode by pressing the mode selection button.
When the button is pressed, the indicators will come on as
shown below, and the blowing air mode can be adjusted as
desired.
Face
The air will blow toward the upper body.
② Automatic A/C control
Bi-level
The air will blow toward the floor and the upper
● Defroster button (defogger button)
Press the defroster button to run the defogger. If the
button ( ) is pressed, the direction of blowing air will be
toward the windshield and door glasses. The A/C will run
automatically and the fresh air mode will be maintained.
The LCD displays , , and If pressing the
defroster button in the automatic mode, AUTO disappears
from the LCD. Pressing the defroster button deactivates
the defogger and returns to the previous state.
In the AUTO mode, use the system as follows:
● Press the AUTO button. The indicator will appear on the

8. Heater and A/C

body. LCD, and the air blowing mode will be selected and
blowing speed will be adjusted automatically.
Floor As this is the economic mode, the A/C system is
automatically controlled based on the climate.
The air will blow toward the floor.
● Set the desired temperature by turning the temperature
control dial.
● If you press any button except for the AUTO button, the
Floor and defroster A/C will be operated in the order of the button pressed.
The air will blow toward the floor, windshield, and Any function except for the function of the pressed button
door windows. will be adjusted automatically. Press the AUTO button to
return to the automatic control.
Defroster ③ Manual A/C control
The air will blow toward the windshield and door ● The automatic A/C system can also be controlled in the
windows. manual mode.
● You can control all the buttons, except for the AUTO
button, manually. (When operating the blower speed
control dial, mode button, A/C button or defroster button,
the A/C is switched to the manual mode.)
● As explained above, the user can adjust the setting of
each function as desired.

8 -7
Manual heater and A/C
How to use manual heater and A/C
Air source selection button A/C button

Blower speed control dial Air distribution control dial Temperature control dial

① Blower speed control dial

The blower speed during ventilation, cooling or heating
can be controlled by four stages. When it is set in the
OFF position, operation will stop.

8 -8
 8. Heater and A/C
A/C indicator

② Air distribution control dial ③ Temperature control dial

The air blowing direction can be selected by turning the After pressing the A/C switch, turn the dial to adjust the
control dial. temperature of the blowing air. Raise the temperature by
turning the dial toward the red zone, and lower the
temperature by turning it toward the blue zone.
: Face
CAUTION
: Bi-level
When operating the A/C, turn the blower speed control dial “ON”,
: Floor and press the A/C button.

: Floor and defrost

: Defrost

8 -9
 Recirculation indicator

④ Recirculation mode button ● Cabin ventilation

When driving in a polluted area or rapid cooling or heating is A/C button: OFF
required, press this button to block air from the outside and Recirculation mode button: OFF
control inside air.
Temperature control dial: proper position
Blowing speed control dial: proper position
Recirculation mode activated: button ON
Fresh air mode activated: button OFF
To ventilate the cabin during driving, set the recirculation
WARNING mode button into the OFF position to draw fresh air into the
If you drive for a long time with the fresh air blocked, the glasses will cabin.
become foggy and the quality of the interior air will be stuffy, obstructing
safe driving.

8 - 10

● Normal heating
A/C button: OFF
Recirculation mode button: OFF
Blowing speed control dial: proper position
Temperature control dial: proper position (red zone)
Set the dial to the proper temperature position when the
inside temperature is low in winter.
8. Heater and A/C
● Maximum heating
A/C button: OFF
Recirculation mode button: ON
Blowing speed control dial: 4th stage
Temperature control dial : red zone end
WARNING
Using the A/C for a long time may cause recirculation of interior air only
and is harmful to your health. If the A/C is used for a long time while the
engine is OFF, it can discharge the battery.
WARNING
The windshield and windows may become foggy due to the temperature
difference between the fresh air and the air in the cabin. This may obstruct
the driver's sight, causing accidents. Utilize switches to prevent fogging
on windows.
8 - 11
 ● Normal cooling
A/C button: ON
Recirculation mode button: OFF
Blowing speed control dial: proper position
Temperature control dial: proper position (blue zone)
Use this for pleasant long-distance driving in summer.
8 - 12
● Maximum cooling
A/C button: ON
Recirculation mode button: ON
Blowing speed control dial: 4th stage
Temperature control dial : blue zone end
WARNING
Using the A/C for a long time may cause recirculation of the air in the cab
only and is harmful to health. If the A/C is used for a long time while the
engine is OFF, it can discharge the battery.
CAUTION
If driving in a congested area or on a long slope with the A/C on, the A/C
may be automatically turned off to protect the engine. If the temperature
gauge on the instrument cluster indicates engine overheating, turn off the
A/C to prevent damage of the engine and have your vehicle checked by
an authorized workshop.
 8. Heater and A/C
● Removing frost
A/C button: ON
Recirculation mode button: OFF
Temperature control dial: proper position
Blowing speed control dial: proper position
Mode selection dial:

Use these position to defrost the windshield and door windows.

8 - 13
Auxiliary heater (behind driver's seat)*
How to use auxiliary heater (behind driver's seat)
It is possible to warm the cabin in winter with the engine stopped.
The bed control module switch can be used to turn on and off the
auxiliary heater, set the desired cabin temperature (10℃ - 35℃ of
the heating suction port), and release the error lock-out. It also
displays the operating status and error code on the “bed control
module” LCD display section.
NOTE
· The auxiliary heater is installed under the bed behind the driver's seat.
It can be operated with the bed control module.
· For further information, refer to the digital temperature controller manual
for diesel vehicle auxiliary heating devices.
8 - 14
NOTE
· Up to two minutes are taken until warm air is supplied into the cabin. To stop
operation, turn the dial to the OFF position and perform run-down operation
for approx. 3 minutes. Then, the system will be automatically turned off.
· If turning off and on the battery switch with the control button ON (body
in operation), the control unit activates the error lock-out function so the
auxiliary heater cannot be operated. In this case, cycle the control switch
to OFF and ON again.
CAUTION
Turn off the auxiliary heater control switch before fueling. If fueling with
the auxiliary heater control switch ON, air or foreign material can enter
the fuel hose and line, leading to vehicle malfunction.
WARNING
To avoid a fire and injury, keep the following instructions:
· Do no install or repair anything without approval. Any installation or repair
should be performed by technicians who are well trained by DAEWOO.
Otherwise, lethal carbon monoxide leak can lead to serious injuries and
suffocation.
· Turn off the switch in a place with flammables to prevent explosion by
the air heater.
· The air temperature at the air heater outlet can rise up to 130 degrees.
Keep enough distance, at least 305 mm, from heat sensitive materials
and people.
· Make sure that the inlet net and outlet net of the air heater are not
covered with cloth or anything. Also, do not remove the outlet net.
1) Malfunction symptom during operation
The following table shows possible malfunction symptoms occurred during operation:
Elapsed time after initial
Malfunction symptom Possible cause
operation (sec.)
The LED is turned off and the system The wiring is faulty. Check the fuse.
won't operate. Immediately
Idling control time: faulty operation (temperature set below air
The motor runs slowly but the system temperature) or abnormal condition (abnormally hot air introduced
Immediately
won't operate. into heating suction port)
The motor runs initially, but it stops soon. 1 Shorted or open spark plug or flame sensor, or defective control unit
The motor stops without run-down Seized or contaminated fan motor
operation. 5

8. Heater and A/C

Run-down state 1 Faulty flame detection
Run-down state 20 Excessively low control unit input voltage
The fuel pump does not operate after Defective fuel pump or its wiring, or heater not cooled
run-down. 120
Run-down state 40 - 120 Poor contact of fuel pump wiring or defective thermo limiter
No ignition: incorrect fuel delivery amount, incorrect fan speed,
clogged burner (especially around pilot flame), restricted intake/
Run-down state 230 exhaust lines for combustion, clogged heat exchanger or no fuel
pump operation
Overheating, low voltage, defective part (flame sensor, glow
Run-down During combustion plug, overheating sensor, fuel pump or burner), no fuel supply or
restricted intake/exhaust lines for combustion
The motor stops without run-down Faulty fan motor or blocked power supply
operation. During combustion
The fuel pump stops operation suddenly. Flame extinguished due to bubbles in fuel, strong air flow led
Then, the fan runs at the full speed for 30 During combustion through exhaust air duct into exhaust line, or abnormal flame
seconds and the pump resumes operation. detection

8 - 15
 2) Error code display
NOTE
Error codes are displayed on the “bed control module” LCD display section.

NO Error code Name Description Action

1 E0-0 Defective control circuit Faulty heater Contact your service center.
Ignition failure Burner ignition failure 1. Check the fuel tank's fuel level and add fuel as necessary.
2. Check if the fuel line is clogged by fuel paraffin. Add cold-
2 E0-1 resistant fuel.
3. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
Misfire during driving Burner flame extinguished 1. Check the fuel tank's fuel level and add fuel as necessary.
2. Check if the fuel line is clogged by fuel paraffin. Add cold-
3 E0-2 resistant fuel.
3. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
4 E0-4 Spurious flame detected Faulty burner Contact your service center.
Heater overheating detected Overheated heater 1. Remove obstacles from the air inlet and outlet of the heater.
5 E1-0 2. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
6 E1-1 Overheating detected Overheated heater Contact your service center.

7 E1-3 Fuel delivery failed No fuel charged Check this during installation.
Main power is supplied
1. Turn off the cabin thermostat and start it again.
8 E1-4 Re-continuity fault again while the cabin
2. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
thermostat is turned on.
Cabin temperature Faulty cabin temperature
9 E1-5 Contact your service center.
control fault controller
1. Turn off the cabin thermostat and start it again.
10 E1-6 Battery discharge protection 9-hour continuous operation
2. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
1. Check the battery voltage (operating voltage: 21 - 32 V).
E3-1 Under-voltage/Over-voltage
11 Faulty battery voltage 2. Check and repair the battery charging system.
E3-2 occurred
3. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.
E5-1
12 Defective flame detector Faulty burner Contact your service center.
E5-2

8 - 16
NO Error code Name Description Action
E6-1
E6-2 Defective heater tempera- Faulty heater temperature
13 Contact your service center.
E6-3 ture sensor sensor
E6-4
1. Check if the fuel pump wiring connector is disconnected, and
E7-1
14 Defective fuel pump Faulty fuel pump take any necessary action.
E7-2
2. If the same error keeps occurring, contact your service center.

E8-1
15 E8-2 Defective blower fan Faulty blower fan Contact your service center.
E8-3

8. Heater and A/C

E9-1
16 Defective ignition heater Faulty ignition heater Contact your service center.
E9-2

8 - 17
MEMO

8 - 18
9. Interior & exterior convenience system
Chapter 1
Storages and interior convenience Top storage box.......................................... 9-14 Chapter 2
system............................................................ 9-2
Rear view camera system*........................ 9-15 Chapter 3
Steering wheel and horn button.................. 9-3
AV and navigation system*....................... 9-16
Chapter 4
Coin box/Cigarette lighter jack.................... 9-4
Navigation unit*/OBD connector............... 9-17
Chapter 5
Ashtray/Center console cup holder............. 9-5
Caution when handling A/V and
Chapter 6
Power socket (12 V) / Digital tachograph....... 9-6 navigation system...................................... 9-18
Chapter 7
Door map pocket/Door ajar warning lamp/ Bed control module (vehicle with
Door step lamp/Sun visor............................ 9-8 sleeper cab)................................................ 9-19 Chapter 8

Seatback pocket/Large capacity Roof rack..................................................... 9-20 Chapter 9

interior storage compartment..................... 9-9
Roof basket ................................................ 9-21 Chapter 10
Fluorescent room lamp.............................. 9-10
Side sun visor ............................................ 9-22 Chapter 11
Reading lamp (vehicle with sleeper cab)/
Car floor mat hook...................................... 9-23 Chapter 12
Antenna....................................................... 9-11
Air connector............................................... 9-24 Chapter 13
Fire extinguisher (ABC)............................. 9-12
Chapter 14
Shoes storage box..................................... 9-13
Storages and interior convenience system

Digital tacho-
graph

Sun visor Sun visor

Top storage
box

Horn Power socket

(12V)

• Ashtray
• Cigarette lighter
jack

WARNING
· Do not store heavy (metal) or sharp objects in the top storage box. The passengers may get injured.
· While driving, close all the storage boxes and compartments. If they are left open while driving, you may get injured at sudden start or stop, or when you are
involved in an accident.
· Do not keep inflammable materials or disposable lighters in the storage boxes and compartments. In summer, inflammable materials or disposable lighters may
explode due to excessive heat, causing a fire.
· Do not place a cup with hot beverage in the front seat cup holder. It may spill over while driving, causing burn or other injuries.

9 -2

Steering wheel and horn button
The horn button is on the center of the steering wheel.
If turning the steel wheel while the vehicle is stationary, tires can
be worn and each part of the steering system is applied with
excessive load, leading to damage. Do not turn the steering
wheel while the vehicle is at a stop.
Steering wheel and horn button
Angle adjustment
13° - 15°
mm
93
9. Interior & exterior convenience system
Steering wheel adjustment button
Press the steering wheel adjustment button and adjust the angle
and height of the steering wheel for your driving comfort.
· Longitudinal adjusting angle: 13° - 15°
· Vertical adjusting height: 93 mm
CAUTION
· After pressing the steering wheel adjustment button (location: on the left
side of the instrument cluster), the angle and height of the steering wheel
can be adjusted for about seven second.
· If the vehicle air pressure is below 6 bar, the angle and height of the steering
wheel may not be adjusted as properly.
WARNING
Do not press the steering wheel adjustment button while driving. An accident
may occur as the steering wheel is not fixed.
9 -3
Coin box/Cigarette lighter jack
Coin box Cigarette lighter jack

If pressing the cigarette lighter, it will automatically pop out with a

You can store coins.
“click” sound after several seconds. Use it by pulling it out from
the jack. The cigarette light can be used while the ignition switch
is in the ACC or ON position.
WARNING
· Make sure that children do not use or play with the cigarette lighter. The
activated cigarette lighter is very hot and can cause burn or a fire.
· If the heated cigarette lighter does not pop out automatically, it may over-
heat, causing fire. In this case, pull it out by force and have it checked by
an authorized service center.
· Do not use the cigarette lighter socket for other purposes. If you use it for other
purposes, the cigarette lighter related components may be damaged or cause fire.

CAUTION
Pressing the heated cigarette lighter continuously will overheat the ciga-
rette lighter and may damage related components.

9 -4
 Ashtray/Center console cup holder
Ashtray Center console cup holder

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

① Press the front of the ashtray cover to open it. There is another cup holder at the back of the center console.
② Pull the ashtray out to empty it.
CAUTION
WARNING
· Be careful when using the cup holder as the cup may fall or the bever-
Never put paper or other inflammables in the ashtray. A fire may be caused age may spill out.
by cigarette butts and ashes.
· Be careful as a cup with hot beverage may fall or spill over, causing
burn.

9 -5
Power socket (12 V) / Digital tachograph
Power socket (12V) Digital tachograph

③
① ②
⑤
④

The digital tachograph offers the driving information such as the

driving speed, mileage, and duration.

NOTE
For further information, please refer to the digital tachograph manual
supplied separately.
Use it when you want to use other electric devices.
① Display/button illumination
WARNING
A 122 x 32 dot graphic LCD is used, and some sections on the
Since it can catch a fire if you leave the vehicle with other electric devices
display shows symbols to indicate the system condition or
on, turn all electric device “OFF” when leaving the vehicle. Also, a fire may
result from overloading. other messages.

NOTE
Only the devices with the load capacity at or below 12 V/10 A can be con-
nected to the power socket. If any device with higher capacity than the
specification is connected to the terminal, power is automatically shut down.
Then, disconnect the device's connecting jack from the terminal completely,
wait for approx. 10 minutes or longer, and try connecting it again.

9 -6
② OK button If you wish to access the setting or other ④ ▶ button You can move between each digit in the
menu modes, press and hold the “OK” menu mode using this button.
button for more than one second to enter the
When entering a value on the right-most digit,
Menu mode.
the cursor goes back to the left-most digit.
This button functions as SELECT and SAVE
The initial screen display can be set by
buttons in any menu screen.
pressing and holding the button (for more
③ ▲/▼ buttons
than one second).
This button allows you to move the cursor
up or down by one step within the menu. The initial display can be set by the driver's

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

If you press the button for one second, the preferences.

⑤ ESC button
digital tachograph will keep counting by 300
ms. It is used to cancel the selected value or go
back one menu level up.
If you release the button, it will stop

⑥ USB terminal
counting.
To download driving information, use the
With this button, you can increase or USB 1.1 series “A” receptacle connector.
decrease the value. This terminal complies with the USB 1.1
Once the value reaches the upper or lower standard.
limit, the digital tachograph will resume
counting.
CAUTION
If you press and hold the ▲ button (for more
than one second) on the initial display mode, Non-certified USB memory sticks may not be compatible with the system
the name and ID of the driver stored in a and should not be used.
USB device will be stored in the digital
tachograph.
CAUTION
If you press and hold the ▼ button (for more
than one second) on the initial display mode, While driving, this device is recording the driving information, so that neither
you will enter the Downloading Driving the buttons can be pressed nor the menu can be accessed.
Record menu.

9 -7
Door map pocket/Door ajar warning lamp/Door step lamp/Sun visor
Door map pocket/Door ajar warning lamp/ Sun visor
Door step lamp

Sun visor Sun visor

Door map pocket

Door step lamp

Door ajar warning lamp

Door map pocket
You can store necessary items in the lower part of the door.
Door ajar warning lamp/Door step lamp
If a door is open, the corresponding door ajar warming lamp and
door step lamp will come on. If that door is closed, they will go off.
CAUTION
If doors are left open for a long time while the engine is off, the door ajar
warning lamp and the door step lamp will keep coming on, which may
discharge the battery.
Sun visors are installed above the driver's seat and passenger's
seat.
If the driver or passenger feels uncomfortable because of direct
sunlight, he or she can change the position of the sun visor as
shown above.
CAUTION
· Attempting to move the sun visor while driving may cause careless driving
or obstruct the driver's sight, causing accidents.
· Adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is stopped.

9 -8
 Seatback pocket/Large capacity interior storage compartment
Seatback pocket Large capacity interior storage compartment

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

A seatback pocket is attached on the back of the driver's seat.
Small items can be stored.
• There is a large capacity storage compartment and tool box
under the bed and in the cabin.
• The storage compartment can be easily accessed by lifting the
bed mat and using the fixing hooks. There is a mounting
position for the tool box in the cabin.

9 -9
Fluorescent room lamp
Fluorescent room lamp
Switch NOTE
The fluorescent room lamp can be come on regardless of the ignition
switch's position.

WARNING
Before removing the fluorescent room lamp, make sure to turn
the room lamp switch “OFF.” Since the room lamp is supplied with
power regardless of the position of the ignition switch, there is a risk of
an electric shock.

NOTE

※ 3 locations of fluorescent room lamp switches

Press the room lamp switch to turn the indoor light on and press it 1. 1 on room lamp
again to turn it off. (fluorescent bulb built-in) 2. 1 on center console
CAUTION 3. 1 on bed control module
- Each switch can independently used to turn on and off the lamp. However,
When the interior lamp is turned on for a long time while the engine is off,
as their operation is not synchronized, the lamp should be turned off with
it may discharge the battery. Check if the interior lamp is on when parking.
the same switch.
NOTE - The switch on the bed control module can be operated only while the ignition
switch is in the ACC position.
The fluorescent room lamp can be turned on and off regardless of the
ignition switch's position.

WARNING
Avoid using the interior lamp when driving at night or in a dark place. Once
the cab becomes brighter, the driver's view is affected, causing accidents.

9 - 10
 Reading lamp (vehicle with sleeper cab)/Antenna
Reading lamp (for vehicle with sleeper cab) Antenna

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

The reading lamp is located on the rear upper part in the cab and
is used for reading before going to bed.
NOTE
· The reading lamp will come on only when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” position.
An integrated antenna is installed on the roof of the cab.
WARNING
For safety, adjust the volume of the audio system to a certain level so that
you can hear sound from outside. Particularly, pay particular attention when
passing crossings or intersections to avoid accidents.

· The switch is located on the bed control module (for vehicle with sleeper
cab).

WARNING
Make sure to turn the reading lamp OFF before removing the reading lamp.
Since the reading lamp is supplied with power regardless of the position of
the ignition switch, there is a risk of an electric shock.

9 - 11
Fire extinguisher (ABC)
Fire extinguisher storage box How to use fire extinguisher

· The ABC powder extinguisher is installed in the large capacity 1. Remove the safety pin (1) from the fire extinguisher while
interior storage compartment behind the driver's seat. standing against wind.
· When removing the fire extinguisher, release its fixing strap (1). 2. Place the nozzle (2) of the fire extinguisher toward the fire
location.
CAUTION 3. Grab the handle (3) and spray the powder on the fire location
If unused for a long time, the extinguishing agent may become hard and be
as if brooming.
not able for use. Make sure to remove and shake it regularly.
Indoor fire extinguisher
Fire extinguisher
(1.5 kg)
Jetting distance 4-5m
Jetting time 11 seconds

9 - 12
 Shoes storage box
Maintenance of fire extinguisher Shoes storage box

Normal

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

1. Check if the needle on the pressure gauge is on the normal There is a shoes storage box outside to keep the cabin clean.
range (green zone) every month. If the pressure is dropped
or other malfunction is occurred, get your vehicle serviced
immediately.
2. The service life of a fire extinguisher is approx. 5 years in a
normal condition. After 5 years, it should be checked and
verified by the fire equipment construction company every
two years.
3. After use, discharge the extinguishing agent (ABC powder)
completely and make sure to have it recharged with the
ABC powder fire extinguishing agent.
4. If unused for a long time, the extinguishing agent may
become hard and be not able for use. Make sure to remove
and shake it regularly.

9 - 13
Top storage box
Top storage box
WARNING
· Do not store heavy (metal) or sharp objects in the top storage box. The
passengers may get injured.
· While driving, close all the storage boxes and compartments. If they are
left open while driving, you may get injured at sudden start or stop, or when
you are involved in an accident.
· Do not keep inflammable materials or disposable lighters in the storage
boxes and compartments. In summer, inflammable materials or disposable
lighters may explode due to excessive heat, causing a fire.

Compartments and storage boxes can be installed in the front left

section of the ceiling. It can accommodate a two-way radio
system or standard size electronic equipment. There is also a
blank cover and room for additional switches.

Items Feature Remarks

Storage box 1 on the left -

Standard DIN size Can install 1 1 on the left:

equipment device Tachograph

9 - 14
 Rear view camera system*
The rear view camera system shows the rear view on the front monitor when the rear view camera constant operation switch is turned on
or the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position.

Rear view camera

Constant operation
switch

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

Rear view monitor

When the rear view camera constant operation switch is operated Rear view monitor Rear view camera
or the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position, the rear view of
the vehicle is displayed on the front monitor.

CAUTION

· A wide-angle lens is used on the rear view camera to secure a wide view.
Therefore, the driver may determine the distance between the vehicle and
the object behind or the size of the object behind incorrectly, causing acci-
dents. Make sure to check the rear, left, and right of the vehicle by yourself.
· Keep in mind that the rear view monitor cannot show the whole rear area.
· For good visibility of the rear area of the vehicle, clean the rear view camera
lens with camera lens cleaner regularly.

9 - 15
AV and navigation system*
External device connection jack and antenna
USB memory stick
Music files (MP3 and WMV), movies
USB and pictures stored in a USB
Memory
stick memory stick can be played through
the USB memory stick connection
port.

AUX jack
Steering wheel If you connect an external audio
audio switch Touch panel AUX jack device like a MP3 player to the
AV monitor connector, you can listen to music
played from that device.

Integrated antenna
● GPS antenna (navigation)
● DMB antenna(ground wave)
● Radio antenna

CAUTION
· The integrated antenna may not have been installed based on the vehicle
specifications (AV or Navigation, etc.).
· If there is a device that transmits or receives radio wave or high frequency
nearby the installed antenna, the antenna may not transmit or receive infor-
mation appropriately. As a result, you may not be able to use the navigation
system or the TV (some local channels obstruct reception) normally.

9 - 16
 Navigation unit*/OBD connector
Navigation unit* OBD connector
SD memory card for
customers
SD memory card for map

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

CAUTION It is a connector for OBD.

Always insert a SD memory card for navigation map to the navigation unit.

CAUTION

• DAEWOO’s navigation system offers navigation information based on the

vehicle in which it is installed, and therefore, the provided navigation infor-
mation and the actual road conditions may differ. Also, the road signs and
signals may change frequently. When driving, make sure to comply with the
actual traffic regulations.
• It is very dangerous to operate the system while driving. Operate the system
only while the vehicle is parked at a safe place.

9 - 17
Caution when handling A/V and navigation system

Caution when handling A/V and navigation system

• Use original discs for the audio system in the vehicle. It is Usable disc
against the law to use illegally downloaded or copied discs.
Also non-original discs may cause defects on the A/V head
unit, making the system unable to play. Navigation unit

• Avoid using a disc, which is not identical to the applied • SD memory card for navigation map
system, as it may cause malfunction.
• Be careful not to get burned as the back of the front monitor Head unit
is hot. • DVD player: DVD/VCD audio CD/MP3 CD
• Avoid using the A/V or navigation system for an extend
• CD player: audio CD
period of time with the ignition switch in the OFF position, as
doing so may discharge the battery.
WARNING
• Do not spill beverage or any foreign material on the system
device. Also when the front monitor is open, make sure not • For the driver's safety and prevention of accidents, the monitor displays
to insert pens or other foreign objects. only the driving information and does not show TV or movies while driving.
• Do not apply excessive force while the front monitor is in • Never watch TV or movies while driving. It causes careless driving, caus-
operation. ing large accidents and resulting in serious injuries or death.
• Be careful that excessive impact on the face of the front • Do not remodel or change the device to watch TV and movies while driving.
monitor may damage the LCD panel and touch screen
panel.
• After turning the ignition switch off, clean the touch screen
using soft cloth or sponge. Avoid using rough cloth, a rag
with chemicals, or organic solvent as it may damage the
panel surface.
• For safety, do not watch TV or movies while driving.
• For further information, please refer to the user's manual for
the navigation system and A/V system.

9 - 18
 Bed control module (vehicle with sleeper cab)
AIR Reading lamp
AIR (auxiliary) heater ON/OFF Press the reading lamp button
button to turn on the reading lamp
(ACC)

Digital clock
BED
Used to set the
Used to start/stop bed heater
minute and second
(ignition switch in ACC position) SET
values to 0 for accu-
rate time setting.

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

Used to switch to
Temperature control dial HOUR “Hour” to set the
Used to control bed hour value.
heater and air (auxiliary) Used to switch to
heater temperature MIN “Minute” to set the
minute value.
AUDIO
Audio power ON/ Power socket (12V)
POWER
OFF Used for other electric conve-
The audio mode nience devices.
MODE changes for each
press of the switch.
ROOM LAMP
Used to turn on room lamp (ig-
+ VOL -
nition switch in ACC position)
Volume Up/Down << SEEK >>
• In CD player/cassette mode
- Push it briefly: plays the next/previous track from the current WINDOW
track
Raising/lowering driver's
- Push and hold it: moves forward /backward on the current track DRIVER
• In radio mode window (ACC)
- Push it briefly: manual frequency search, moves to another Raising/lowering passen-
ASSIST
memorized channel ger's window (ACC)
- Push and hold it: automatic frequency search
※ For further information, refer to the digital temperature controller manual for diesel vehicle supplementary heating devices.

9 - 19
Roof rack
Roof rack
Luggage can be loaded using the roof rack on top of the vehicle.
Make sure that luggage loaded on the vehicle does not damage
the vehicle body.
When using auxiliary devices for luggage loading (carrier, etc.),
take enough consideration of the vehicle condition and safety.
CAUTION
When loading luggage, the contact between luggage and the roof may dam-
age the vehicle. To prevent vehicle damage, use protective covers like cloth
or cushions between luggage and the roof.
9 - 20
WARNING
· The maximum load capacity of the roof rack on top of the vehicle is 80 kg.
Have the load weight evenly distributed on the upper part of the roof rack
and fasten the luggage securely. Overloading of luggage may damage the
vehicle and cause accidents.
· Make sure that the luggage loaded on the roof rack does not stick out of the
roof. If it sticks out of the roof, it may damage your vehicle or other vehicles
and may also impede running stability, causing accidents.
· If the luggage loaded on the roof rack falls off the vehicle while driving, it
may damage other vehicles, injure pedestrians, and result in more serious
accidents. Fix the luggage on the roof rack securely so that the it does not fall
off. When driving for long distance, check frequently that it is fixed correctly.
· When luggage is loaded on the roof rack, drive slowly for safety.
· If luggage is loaded on the roof rack, the vehicle's center of gravity goes
up. Therefore, abrupt steering wheel operation during abrupt braking, rapid
turning or driving at a high speed can make the vehicle unstable, leading
to an accident or rollover.
· If there is a heavy load on the roof rack while tilting, the cab may not be lifted
or lowered properly. Remove load from the roof rack before tilting the cab.
 Roof basket
Caution when installing roof basket - cab roof panel
The roof basket can be additionally installed only on a vehicle with the roof rack.

Air horn mounting holes Example - Correct position Example - Wrong position
(four locations) (using roof rack) (using air horn mounting hole)
Vehicle with roof rack

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

CAUTION
• The maximum load weight of both the roof basket and cover should not exceed 80 kg.
• To install a roof basket, use the roof rack. Do not install a roof basket to the vehicle not equipped with a roof rack.
• Never use the air horn mounting holes (four locations) to support the roof basket. Particularly, using the air horn mounting holes may damage the
panel. If damaged, it can not be covered by the warranty.

9 - 21
Side sun visor
Side sun visor

Mirror side

To lower the side sun visor, hold the guide To raise the side sun visor, pull the rope
bar and pull it down. down.

WARNING
While driving, make sure that the side sun visor does not block the mirror side. If the side sun visor blocks the mirror side, the driver cannot see the rear side of
the vehicle, causing an accident.
However, you can lower and use it when the vehicle is stopped.

9 - 22
 Car floor mat hook
Floor mat hook

Floor mat hook

9. Interior & exterior convenience system

When installing a floor mat, fix the mat on the hooks located on
the floor of the driver's and passenger's seats.

WARNING
· If the floor mats are not secured so the mat slips or obstructs the movement
of the pedals while driving, it may cause an accident.
· Do not place other mats on the already installed floor mat. The floor mat
may move and obstruct the operation of the pedals, causing accidents.
· If you need to remove the mat for cleaning, be careful as the hooks on the
floor may get damaged.
· When installing a mat, use only the compatible one for the vehicle model.

9 - 23
Air connector
Air connector

· The air connector is installed under the passenger's seat to use air. Connect the device to the air connector to clean the driver's and
passenger's seat or the area near the connector. Also use air tools by connecting them to the air connector.
· Always use the air connector with the engine running. Otherwise, it can only be used until the air tank becomes empty.
· As the supplied items may differ by vehicle models, the owner should purchase other required tools for connection.

9 - 24
MEMO

9 - 25
MEMO

9 - 26
10. Emergency Measures
Chapter 1

Emergency warning tripod Cautions when using or replacing Chapter 2

(vehicle stop sign)....................................... 10-2 spare tire................................................... 10-18
Chapter 3

Emergency stop.......................................... 10-3 In case of engine overheating................. 10-19 Chapter 4

Emergency start.......................................... 10-4 Caution for towing.................................... 10-21 Chapter 5

When battery is discharged....................... 10-5 If towing vehicle is not available Chapter 6

(in emergency).......................................... 10-24
OVM (On Vehicle Material) Tools............... 10-6 Chapter 7
When vehicle is stuck in sand, Chapter 8
In case of a flat tire while driving............... 10-8 mud or snow............................................. 10-25
Chapter 9
Tire wheel nut loosening direction............ 10-9 In case of an accident/fire/
heavy snow............................................... 10-26 Chapter 10
Removing and replacing spare tire........ 10-10
Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Emergency warning tripod (vehicle stop sign)
Emergency warning tripod (vehicle stop sign)
● When the vehicle stops on the highway or driveway due to a
breakdown
- First, move the vehicle to a safe place on the shoulder, turn
on the hazard warning lamp and stand the emergency
warning tripod at least 100 m behind the vehicle.
- The driver and any passenger in the vehicle should
evacuate to a safe place.
● In case of a breakdown at night
- First, move the vehicle to a safe place on the shoulder, turn
on the hazard warning lamp and stand the emergency
warning tripod at least 200 m behind the vehicle.
- The driver should warn the incoming traffic of the emergency
situation by standing a warning light baton or a beacon
lamp at least 200 m behind the vehicle.
10 - 2
● If you cannot pull over on the shoulder or move to a safe
place or the vehicle stops at a curved road due to a
breakdown
- First, move the vehicle to the outer side of the road, turn
on the hazard warning lamp and stand the emergency
warning tripod at least 200 m behind the vehicle.
- The driver should warn the incoming traffic of the
emergency situation with a hand signal using a warning
light baton.
WARNING
1. The emergency warning tripod should be set behind the vehicle (day-
time: 100 m behind, nighttime: 200 m behind). At night, a beacon lamp
or warning light baton should also be set 200 m behind the vehicle
and it should be recognizable in the distance of at least 500 m.
2. Be careful of the surroundings, especially passing vehicles, during
installation.
3. When installing a emergency warning tripod, make sure that its reflector
is placed where other drivers can see it well.
4. Before resuming driving again, make sure to remove the emergency
warning tripod fast and safely while being careful of the incoming traffic.
NOTE
According to the law, you must carry, and if required, install the emergency
warning tripod (stop sign). According to the traffic law, you must carry a
standard product, and if you fail to carry and install the emergency tripod,
you will be fined based on the law.
 Emergency stop
Emergency stop

10. Emergency Measures

● In case of malfunction or an emergency stop, pull over on ● A
 pply the parking brake and turn the hazard warning lamp
the shoulder as fast as possible and stop the vehicle. on to avoid an accident.

10 - 3
Emergency start
Emergency start

WARNING ● Jump starting

If the battery is discharged, perform jump starting by
If you drive the defective vehicle, accidents may occur. referring to “Battery Maintenance.”

●  Avoid towing to start the engine. If the engine starts while

being towed, it may clash with the towing vehicle.

10 - 4

If the battery is discharged so the engine cannot be started, you can start the engine by using a battery from another vehicle or an
auxiliary battery of which specifications and capacity are identical to your battery. Refer to the procedure below.
How to connect jumper cable
1. (+) terminal of discharged battery
2. (+) terminal of normal battery for power supply
3. (-) terminal of normal battery for power supply
4. Vehicle body with discharged battery (distant from battery:
engine towing hook)
① Prepare jumper cables.
② Move another vehicle with a 24V power close to your
vehicle so that the jumper cables can reach.
③ Turn off all the electrical devices on the discharged vehicle.
④ Shift the shift lever of the discharged vehicle to the “P”
position (automatic transmission) or the “N” position
(manual transmission) and apply the parking brake.
⑤ Connect the jumper cables.
When battery is discharged
WARNING
· When connecting a auxiliary battery to the discharged battery using jumper
cables, do not connect the jumper cables directly to the negative (-) terminal
of the discharged battery. Direct connection may cause explosion.
· If the engine is started with the jumper cables not securely connected,
they may be disconnected due to sudden vibration. If any disconnected
cable touches the vehicle body, an electric shock may be applied to
the vehicle, damaging electric/electronic parts.
· While connecting jumper cables, gas from the battery can explode by
a spark. Make sure to use the standard jumper cables and a battery
10. Emergency Measures
of which capacity is identical to the original battery.
· When connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the positive (+)
and negative (-) cables do not touch each other. If they make contact,
it will generate sparks, which may be dangerous.
· The battery fluid is highly acidic. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin,
take off all the clothing contaminated and wash your eyes or skin with
clean water. Also, seek medical advice.
· If you are being taken by an ambulance, continue to wipe off the contact
area with water using soft cloth or a sponge.
CAUTION
· When connecting the jumper cables to the vehicle with the charged
battery, make sure to turn off the engine.
· When starting the engine, make sure that the jumper cables are not
wound up onto the fan.
⑥ Start the engine of the vehicle with the charged battery
and let the engine idle for a few minutes.
⑦ Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged vehicle.
⑧ Once the engine starts, remove the jumper cable from the
(-) terminal first and then remove the cable from the (+)
terminal.
10 - 5
OVM (On Vehicle Material) Tools
OVM tool box
Type A

The OVM tool box is installed on the left/right side or below the bed in the cab to store necessary OVM tools.
Type B*
The OVM tool box is installed onto the left/right side frame in the
cabin to store necessary OVM tools.

CAUTION
After using the OVM tools, put them back to the original place.

NOTE
The mounting location of the OVM tool box may differ by vehicle models.

10 - 6
OVM tool list

No. Tool Name Qty No. Tool Name Qty

Spare tire 7 Spanner 19 X 22 1

1 carrier handle 1
100x200x610
8 Screwdriver (small) 1

2 Pliers 1

10. Emergency Measures

9 Screwdriver (large) 1

3 Screw wrench 1 Wheel nut wrench

10 1
Ø32 X Ø30

11 Wrench handle 1
4 Spanner 7 X 8 1

12 Cab tilt lever 1

5 Spanner 10 X 12 1

O
O
W
E
A
D
13 Tool set case 1
6 Spanner 14 X 17 1

10 - 7
In case of a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while driving, abrupt braking can overturn the
vehicle. If a tire is punctured, grab the steering wheel firmly, apply
the brake pedal several times to decrease the speed gradually,
and then park the vehicle at a safe place. Also, before replacing
the flat tire with a spare tire, turn on the hazard warning lamp and
install the emergency warning tripod to avoid other accidents.
When replacing the flat tire with a spare tire, refer to the spare tire
replacement instruction.

WARNING
· The emergency warning tripod should be set behind the vehicle (day-
time: 100 m behind, nighttime: 200 m behind). At night, a beacon lamp
or warning light baton should also be set 200 m behind the vehicle and
it should be recognizable in the distance of at least 500 m.
In case of a flat tire while driving, you may experience the · Place chock blocks at the front and back of the tire which is diagonal
following symptoms: to the tire to be replaced.
· Vehicle vibration · Have all passengers get off the vehicle and evacuate to level and safe
· Strange sounds from the tire place before replacing the tire.
· Unbalanced steering wheel
· If the front tire is flat, the steering wheel leans to the side where
the flat tire is, and if the rear tire is flat, the steering wheel
sways from side to side.
WARNING
· If a tire goes flat while driving, the driver may panic, operating the
steering wheel wrongly or applying a sudden brake, which may result in
accidents. In this case, do not panic, grab the steering wheel firmly and
press the brake pedal to decrease the speed. Then turn on the hazard
warning lamp and stop the vehicle at a safe place.
· When a tire is flat, do not drive even for a short distance. If you keep
driving, it can lead to tire damage and dangerous situations.

10 - 8
 Tire wheel nut loosening direction
Tire wheel nut loosening direction (counterclockwise: left)

①
⑦
⑤
③
④

10. Emergency Measures

⑥
⑧
②

· To unscrew the tire wheel nuts, turn them “counterclockwise (left).”

· To tighten the tire wheel nuts, turn them “clockwise (right).”
· Unfasten or fasten the nuts evenly in a diagonal order.

WARNING
For a new vehicle or after replacing a tire, make sure to retighten the wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque
after initial 50 to 100 km and 1,000 km of driving. Then, tighten them at every 4,000 km. Otherwise, tires can be de-
tached, resulting in a serious injury or property damage. Particularly, vehicles attached with additional axles (pusher
and tag) without permission need to be checked with the wheel nut tightening condition before and after driving.
※ Specified wheel nut tightening torque - Front wheel/rear wheel (8 stud type): M22 (55 - 65 kg·m)

10 - 9
Removing and replacing spare tire
Removing spare tire (Type A)
- Remove two spare tire mounting bolts (24 mm).
- Fit the spare tire carrier handle into the hole of the spare tire
carrier and turn the spare tire carrier handle counterclockwise
(left) to lower the tire.
- To mount the spare tire, place the disc wheel axle up, fit the
spare tire carrier handle into the spare tire carrier hole, and
turn the handle clockwise (right).
- After fastening up the spare tire, make sure to fix the tire
firmly with two spare tire mounting bolts.
- Check if the spare tire is securely fixed without any wobble.
10 - 10
CAUTION
Once the tire is raised up a bit, check if the hanger is securely inserted to
the hole of the disc wheel and the chain is not twisted while fastening it up.
CAUTION
Perform an accurate maintenance work on the spare tire, paying particular
attention to the inflation pressure and appearance.
WARNING
· If you drive the vehicle without firmly securing the spare tire, the spare
tire may fall off and collide with other vehicles, causing accidents.
· Make sure to mount the spare tire safely. If you want to mount the spare
tire securely, use an authorized service center.
Removing spare tire (Type B)
- Remove the spare tire mounting nut.
- Fit the spare tire carrier handle into the hole of the spare tire
carrier and turn the spare tire carrier handle counterclockwise
(left) to lower the tire.
- To mount the spare tire, place the disc wheel axle up, fit the
spare tire carrier handle into the spare tire carrier hole, and
turn the handle clockwise (right).
- After fastening up the spare tire, make sure to fix the tire
firmly with the spare tire mounting nut.
- Check if the spare tire is securely fixed without any wobble.
10. Emergency Measures
CAUTION
Once the tire is raised up a bit, check if the hanger is securely inserted to
the hole of the disc wheel and the chain is not twisted while fastening it up.
CAUTION
Perform an accurate maintenance work on the spare tire, paying particular
attention to the inflation pressure and appearance.
WARNING
· If you drive the vehicle without firmly securing the spare tire, the spare
tire may fall off and collide with other vehicles, causing accidents.
· Make sure to mount the spare tire safely. If you want to mount the spare
tire securely, use an authorized service center.
10 - 11
Replacing spare tire
1. Place chock blocks at the front and back of the tire which is
diagonal to the tire to be replaced.
WARNING
When replacing the tire with the spare tire, make sure to apply the park-
ing brake in advance.
2. Before lifting the vehicle with the jack, fit the wheel nut wrench
to the wheel nut accurately and turn it counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nut a bit. (do not remove it completely)
WARNING
· Do not remove the wheel nut completely, but loosen it little bit so that it can be
easily unfastened. If it is completely removed, the wheel may be detached from
the vehicle and the vehicle body may drop onto the ground, causing injuries.
· Unfasten the wheel nut in two to three steps.
10 - 12
3. For a vehicle with the air suspension system, wait for about
three minutes after removing the ignition key to protect the
system before installing the jack in order.
WARNING
Before installing the jack, all passengers should get off the vehicle. If the
passengers move in the vehicle while the vehicle is lifted by the jack, the
jack may become tilted, causing vehicle damage or personal injuries.
4. After installing the jack in such a way that the bottom of the
jack makes complete contact to the ground, operate the jack
so that the top plate of the jack meets the jack installation
point of the axle.
Front wheel jack point For flat front tire
Below front axle If jack is not available

10. Emergency Measures

● To protect the vehicle body, make sure that the top plate of the
jack is accurately installed under the correct position of the
axle as shown in the figure.
WARNING
· If the bottom of the jack and the ground do not make complete contact,
the vehicle may fall off the jack during the work, causing injuries.
· When installing the jack, place it perpendicular to the vehicle frame. If the jack
is not perpendicular to the vehicle frame, but slanted with the frame when
using the jack, the vehicle may fall off the jack, causing a serious injury.
· When using the jack, make sure that no one goes under the vehicle.
· When lifting the weight over the safe load, do not use a jack.
Supporting with wooden blocks
● When the person who replaces the spare tire lifts the jack, there
is a risk of accidents. To ensure safety, prepare wooden blocks.
Place wooden blocks under the front axle and lower the jack
slightly to ensure that the axle is supported by the blocks
securely. Then, move the jack again to the bottom of the axle
and continue the work.

CAUTION
Installing and using the jack on the vehicle body can damage the vehicle
body. Make sure to have the top plate of the jack accurately installed on
the frame part indicated below.

10 - 13
Rear jack point For flat rear tire
Below rear axle If jack is not available

● Operating tips
· If the vehicle on which the jack is to be installed is high from CAUTION
the ground, turn the jack head to the left and pull it up little Make sure to install the jack under the axle. Never install the jack under
bit before installing it. the other parts, especially, the torque rod assembly. The vehicle may
· Fit the groove at the end of the wheel nut wrench connecting get damaged.
rod to the jack release stem and turn it to the right to lock it.
· After the above procedure, fit the connecting rod to the jack
pump and pump the jack slowly.
· If the road surface is low or the tire is flat so that the vehicle
height is too low for the jack to support the vehicle, drive the
vehicle to place the tire to be replaced onto the auxiliary
support, such as a block, and continue the work.

10 - 14
 10. Emergency Measures
5. Turn the jack head left or right to adjust its height, fit the oil 6. Remove the wheel nuts completely.
jack lever to the socket and move it up and down. Raise the
vehicle a bit from the ground so that the wheels can be CAUTION
rotated freely. Unfasten the wheel nut in two to three steps.

WARNING
7. Remove the tire and place it under the vehicle or the most
Do not raise the vehicle more than necessary. If the jack becomes tilted, protruded part of the vehicle body. This is to minimize injuries
the vehicle can be damaged severely or serious injuries may result. if the vehicle falls off the jack due to external factors.

WARNING
Never start the engine while the vehicle is lifted with a jack. If starting the
engine, the jack can be tilted, damaging the vehicle or causing an injury.

10 - 15
 ①
⑤ ⑦
④ ③
⑥
⑧ ②
8. Mount the spare tire and tighten the wheel nuts loosely so
that the wheel does not rattle.
WARNING
The reason to tighten the wheel nuts loosely so that the wheel does not
rattle is to prevent the wheel from being titled against the vehicle when
it makes contact to the ground after releasing the jack.
9. Take out the tire under the vehicle, lower the jack so that the
wheel touches the ground completely, and take out the jack
from the vehicle.
WARNING
If you apply too much force in tightening the wheel nuts while the vehicle
is raised by the jack, the vehicle may fall off, causing injuries.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts completely in two to three steps,
using the wheel wrench in a diagonal order.
11. Once the tire replacement is complete, store the flat tire
temporarily in a cargo area, and return the jack and
emergency tools back to the original place.
10 - 16
● Do not over-fasten the nuts with the wheel wrench using feet or
connecting a pipe to the wheel wrench. Excessive fastening may
damage the wheel wrench or wheel nuts.
WARNING
· The spare tire should only be used in an emergency and should never be used for
normal driving. After installing the spare tire, visit a nearby authorized service center
or a tire specialist to have it replaced with the standard tire.
· Inaccurate or excessive tightening of the wheel nuts may result in loosening of the nuts
or brake malfunctioning, causing an unstable driving status. Particularly, if the wheel
nuts become loose due to inaccurate tightening, the wheel may fall off the vehicle,
causing a serious accident.
WARNING
For a new vehicle or after replacing a tire, make sure to retighten the wheel nuts to the speci-
fied tightening torque after initial 50 to 100 km and 1,000 km of driving. Then, tighten them
at every 4,000 km. Otherwise, tires can be detached, resulting in a serious injury or property
damage. Particularly, vehicles attached with additional axles (pusher and tag) without permis-
sion need to be checked with the wheel nut tightening condition before and after driving.
※ Specified wheel nut tightening torque - Front wheel/rear wheel (8 stud type):
M22 (55 - 65 kg·m)
Checking spare tire carrier
CAUTION
Check the operation condition of the spare tire carrier regularly, and add
grease so as to prevent its seizure.

10. Emergency Measures

Check the operation status of the spar tire carrier in every six
months and add more grease.

10 - 17
Cautions when using or replacing spare tire

Cautions when using or replacing spare tire

▶ Before replacing tire

· Check the surroundings for safety and move, as best as you can, the vehicle to a level and safe place away from other
vehicles. Turn on the hazard warning lamp and apply the parking brake securely.
· Make sure to install the jack only on the specified location. Also, while using the jack, never go under the vehicle. Also, do not
start the engine or apply excessive force onto the vehicle.
· Perform tire replacement after having all passengers get off the vehicle.
· For the vehicle equipped with the air suspension system (EAS), remove the key from the ignition switch and wait for approx.
3 minutes to protect the system before installing a jack.
▶ Tightening wheel nuts
· Do not tighten them all at once, but tighten them in several steps in a diagonal order.
· When tightening the wheel nuts, the wheel bolts are often damaged as a technician steps on the wrench or uses a pneumatic
tool to tighten rusty bolt or nut, resulting in over-tightening. Therefore, when applying oil, make sure to comply with the
specified tightening torque.
▶ After replacing tire
· After fitting the spare tire in emergency, visit a nearby authorized service center or a tire specialist to have it replaced with the
standard tire. Make sure to keep the specified tightening torque. Replace or repair any damaged tire.
· When re-installing the spare tire, fix it firmly to prevent its unnecessary movement. If it is not fixed firmly, abnormal noise may
be heard due to its play during driving. Also, if it falls off the vehicle, it can damage other vehicles and injure pedestrians.
· Check the tightening condition and inflation pressure of the tires before driving.
· If the spare tire is mounted, try to drive at a speed under 60 km/h.
· For the vehicle equipped with the TPMS, the TPMS warning lamp comes on and the TPMS does not operate after installing
the spare tire.

WARNING
· If the spare tire is mounted, drive at a speed under 60 km/h.
· In order to maintain the characteristics of the vehicle, use tires with the same specifications and by the same make.

10 - 18
 In case of engine overheating
If the engine overheats, the engine power is reduced. Also, the
coolant temperature gauge on the instrument cluster indicates the
“H” zone or the coolant temperature warning lamp comes on.
Engine coolant
temperature warning lamp CAUTION
Engine coolant If the engine overheats, the engine power is reduced. In this
temperature gauge case, park the vehicle in a safe place immediately.

Symptoms of engine overheating

10. Emergency Measures

· Engine overheat warning lamp ON (illuminated: over
105 º, Flashing: over 110 º)
· Coolant temperature gauge indicating “H”
· Power drop

10 - 19
Measures to be taken if the engine overheats
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever to the CAUTION
“P” position for the automatic transmission vehicle and apply
the parking brake. Place the shift lever to the “N” position for · If the engine overheats with low coolant level, turn off the engine im-
the manual transmission vehicle and apply the parking brake. mediately and let it cool off.

2. Turn off the cooler/heater and open the front inspection panel · Open the cap on the coolant reservoir tank only after the engine is
to ventilate the engine compartment. turned off and sufficiently cools off.

3. If steam is visible, turn off the engine immediately. · Be careful that opening the cap on the coolant reservoir tank while the
engine is not yet sufficiently cooled off may cause a burn.
If steam is not visible, keep the engine idling and keep the
· Adding cold water suddenly while the engine is still hot may damage
front inspection panel open.
the engine or radiator. Add water only after the engine is sufficiently
4. If the needle on the coolant temperature gauge does not go cooled off.
down even with the engine idling, turn off the engine and
· Use only the genuine product (anti-freeze) that meets the specification.
have it cooled down sufficiently.
· If the engine still keeps overheating after emergency measures, have
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir tank. If the your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized service center.
coolant level is low, check for any leakage on the joints of
each hose or on the radiator.
6. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir tank. If
necessary, add more coolant.
7. To add coolant, grab the cap on the coolant reservoir tank
with a towel or other cloth and loosen it a bit to release vapor
pressure in the tank. Then, open the cap completely and add
more coolant. After adding coolant, close the cap.
8. If there is enough coolant, have an authorized service center
check and repair belts and cooling system (including the
cooling fan, etc.).

10 - 20
 Caution for towing
Caution for towing

1 3 5

R 2 4 6

10. Emergency Measures

· If the vehicle needs to be towed, release the parking brake CAUTION
and set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position before towing.
If the vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground and the front
· The best way to avoid vehicle damage while being towed is to wheels raised, the transmission can be damaged.
load and transport the vehicle on a cargo bed.
· If the vehicle needs to be towed using its two wheels, tow it by
lifting the rear wheels (drive wheels).

CAUTION
Be careful that towing with two wheels raised may damage the vehicle
bumper and underbody parts.

10 - 21
 (1) Set the shift lever to the neutral position.
CAUTION Rear axle shaft
※ Vehicle with ZF transmission
To protect the transmission, vehicles equipped with the ZF transmission
need to be towed with the range switch set to the high range position.

Rear axle flange

Propeller shaft

(3) If the differential or rear axle gear is damaged, remove the

rear axle shaft before towing.

(2) If the transmission gear is engaged, separate the propeller

shaft completely from the rear axle flange, and then fix the
propeller shaft securely on the frame.

10 - 22
 10. Emergency Measures
Spring chamber

(4) If the air system is faulty, the spring chamber brake is

constantly engaged. Therefore, insert the release bolt next
to the spring chamber into the hole on the back of the spring
chamber and turn the nut clockwise to release the brake.

CAUTION
All the procedures should be performed with the vehicle securely fixed.
This is extremely important because working underneath the vehicle may
be dangerous if the vehicle moves.

10 - 23
If towing vehicle is not available (in emergency)
If two truck is not available (in emergency) Tow hook location

Within 5 m

● If there is no other alternative but to use the rope to tow the

vehicle, use the following procedure:
1. Connect the rope securely onto the tow hook.
2. Attach white cloth in the middle of the rope so that the
towing rope can be identified.
3. Release the parking brake of the vehicle to be towed and
set the selection lever and the shift lever to NEUTRAL.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lamps on both the towing
vehicle and the vehicle being towed.
5. Maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Also, when CAUTION
braking the vehicle being towed, depress the brake pedal
· If it is impossible to use a towing service, make sure to tow the vehicle
with more force than normal.
with the driver seated in the towed vehicle. In case of defects on the
6. If the engine is turned off, place the ignition key in the ON electric, steering or braking system, do not follow this method.
position.
· When using the front tow hook or rear tow hook, make sure that even
7. Make sure that the length of the towing rope is within 5 m and force is applied horizontally to the front and back.
the total length of the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle
· If the towing zone has many steep slopes or hills, do not follow this method.
does not exceed 25 m. The driving speed should be lower
than 5 km/h and the towing distance should be within 25 km. · If the engine does not operate, the brake performance is greatly degraded.
Make sure to depress the brake pedal with more force than usual.
WARNING · Operate the turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp on the towed
vehicle according to the signal from the towing vehicle during towing.
· The tow hook is for temporary and short-distance towing and for rescue
purposes and should not be used for regular towing. · Avoid unreasonable towing and do not tow a vehicle if it is heavier
than the towing vehicle.
· Make sure to take extra care when towing. Avoid sudden acceleration
or violent driving that may impose excessive load on the emergency · If the ignition key is in the OFF position, the steering wheel becomes
tow hook and towing rope or chain. Damaging the tow hook and towing locked and cannot be used. Make sure to set the ignition key in the
rope or chain may cause serious injuries or vehicle damage. ACC or ON position.

10 - 24
 When vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow
When vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow
CAUTION
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting. The transmission
may get damaged.
R↔1
WARNING
Before pulling out the vehicle from snow, mud or sand, check if there
are any obstacles or people around the vehicle. While the vehicle is
moving, it may spring forward or backward suddenly, causing accidents.

10. Emergency Measures

NOTE
If the vehicle cannot be pulled out, get help from other vehicles or request
a towing service.

If the vehicle is stuck in sand or mud and cannot move, remove

sand or bud on the front wheels by turning the steering wheel left
and right.
While depressing the accelerator pedal slowly, move the shift
lever between D and R (automatic transmission) or D1 and R
(manual transmission) to pull out the vehicle using elastic force.

10 - 25
In case of an accident/fire/heavy snow
In case of an accident
In case of an accident, turn on the hazard warning lamp and park
the vehicle at a safe place if possible to prevent a follow-up
accident by other vehicles. If there are injured people, call an
ambulance and contact a nearby police station.
10 - 26
Fire on vehicle
Make sure to install a fire extinguisher inside the vehicle.
In case of a fire, do not panic. Stop the engine and put out the fire
with the fire extinguisher.
· Remove the safety pin from the fire extinguisher while
standing against wind. Then, point the nozzle to the fire.
· Hold the fire extinguisher lever and spray the powder as if
brooming.
NOTE
Have a full understanding of the usage and maintenance of the fire
extinguisher in advance by using the manual on the side of the fire
extinguisher.
If there is no fire extinguisher, get help from others and extinguish the
fire with water or contact a fire department.
WARNING
The vehicle contains various fluids, fabrics and plastic parts which can
easily spread fire from one position to another in a second. Therefore,
all passengers should get off the vehicle and move to a safe place.
WARNING
Modifying the vehicle's electric device may cause a fire. Never modify
electric devices on the vehicle without approval. DAEWOO is not respon-
sible for a fire caused by modification of the vehicle's electric device.
In case of heavy snow
Actions to be taken in case of heavy snow
· Listen to the radio and use your local highway information line.
· Reduce speed when driving on a curve, hill or bridge.
· Avoid leaving the vehicle and parking on the shoulder as it
will interrupt snow plowing work.
· If you have no other option but to leave the vehicle, make
sure to leave contact information.
· Maintain enough vehicle-to-vehicle distance and avoid
applying the brake.

10. Emergency Measures

· Remove snow around the vehicle regularly so that the muffler
does not get blocked by snow.

Highway hot line and regional radio frequency guide

· Contact your local highway information office.
· Contact your local traffic information office.

10 - 27
MEMO

10 - 28
11. Inspection and Maintenance
Checking before driving...................................... 11-2 Checking wiper operation and replacing Chapter 1
wiper blade........................................................ 11-49
Engine oil.............................................................. 11-3 Chapter 2
Focusing headlamp/lamp replacement
Engine oil filter..................................................... 11-6
and lamp type.................................................... 11-52 Chapter 3
Manual transmission fluid................................... 11-9
Lamp bulb specification and inspection........ 11-53
Chapter 4
Automatic transmission fluid........................... 11-10 Fuse and relay................................................... 11-54
Rear axle oil........................................................ 11-13 Chapter 5
Opening cabin fuse and relay box
Power steering fluid.......................................... 11-14 (fuse box on passenger's side)....................... 11-55 Chapter 6
Dry air cleaner................................................... 11-17 Checking exterior lamps.................................. 11-59
Chapter 7
Replacing exterior lamps................................. 11-60
Engine fuel filter................................................ 11-20
Replacing interior lamps.................................. 11-63 Chapter 8
Bleeding fuel system........................................ 11-27
BCM (Body Control Module)/ABS ECU/ Chapter 9
Fuel tank/Changing engine coolant................ 11-31
DC-DC converter............................................... 11-66
Checking and adjusting clutch........................ 11-32 Chapter 10
Battery maintenance (semi-permanent
Checking and adjusting brake......................... 11-34 MF battery)......................................................... 11-67 Chapter 11
Bleeding clutch system.................................... 11-35 Vehicle emission standard............................... 11-71
Chapter 12
Checking tires and wheels............................... 11-37 Noise and vibration control components....... 11-72
Precautions and warnings on self Chapter 13
Greasing points................................................. 11-42
maintenance work............................................. 11-73
Air drier ............................................................ 11-46 Chapter 14
Troubleshooting................................................ 11-74
Air compressor.................................................. 11-48
Maintenance schedule chart............................ 11-77
Checking before driving
For safe and pleasant driving, the following points should be checked daily before driving:

Item Inspection Location Description

● Steering wheel and steering ① Vibration and rattle of steering wheel
device ② Heavy or stuck feeling during operation
Steering system ③ Damage or loosing of components
④ Grease level
⑤ Damage on the dust cover in the ball joints
● Brake pedal ● Pedal free-play, the gap between the pedal and floor when depressed,
and braking power
Brake system ● Parking brake ● Operation
● Air tank and air pressure gauge ● Change of water and air pressure level in the tank
● Wheels and tires ① Tightness and damage of bolts and nuts
Driving system ② Excessive wear and damage of wheels and tires, inflation pressure
③ Locking condition of the spare tire

Suspension system ● Chassis spring ● Leaf spring cracks, cuts and “U” bolts tightness
● Engine ① Engine starting
② Leakage of fuel, lubricant and coolant
③ Air cleaner cleanness and damage
Engine ④ Emission condition
⑤ Belt tension
⑥ Engine oil level
● Exhaust brake ● Operation
● Clutch ● Clutch pedal free play, the gap between the pedal and floor when
depressed, operation condition
Power train ● Clutch fluid ● Clutch fluid level
● Transmission ● Transmission operation and oil leakage
● Propeller shaft and rear axle ● Propeller shaft vibration, rear axle housing oil leakage
● Control lever ● Operation
Options ● PTO ● Switches and PTO operation condition
● Related parts ● Chassis grease level

11 - 2
 Engine oil
Engine oil
Engine oil at a specified level lubricates and cools the inside of the engine, improves the engine performance, and lengthens its service life. The engine oil
filter removes foreign materials in engine oil. It is a normal phenomenon that a small amount of engine oil is consumed even if there is no leakage. Engine oil
consumption is increased when the vehicle is used in a harsh condition, the vehicle is driven at a high speed or abrupt deceleration is frequently performed.
CAUTION
If made contact to the skin, engine oil may irritate it, causing skin diseases. Wipe it out from the skin using soap and water or hand cleaner.

WARNING
Keep engine oil away from children. If children drink engine oil, they may become serious injured or lose a life.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

(1) Engine oil level gauge location
DL06K (Doosan) engine F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine B5.9 (Cummins engine)

1) DL06K (DOOSAN) engine: The engine oil 2) F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: The engine oil 3) B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine: You can find the
dipstick can be found between the ECU and oil dipstick can be found on top of the ECU on the dipstick between the injection pump and fuel
filter on the right side of the engine (passenger left side of the engine (driver side) by raising filter on the left side of the engine (driver side)
side) by raising the cab. the cab. by raising the cab.
CAUTION
If the engine oil pressure warning lamp comes on, check the engine oil level with the engine oil dipstick.

11 - 3
(2) Checking fluid level
1) Check as follows:
① Park the vehicle on level ground and turn off the engine.
② Wait for about 20 minutes until the engine oil is gathered on
the oil pan.
③ Pull out the engine oil dipstick, clean it, and insert it back
to the tube.
④ Pull out the engine oil dipstick again and check the level and
contamination. The oil level should be located between the
MAX and MIN limit lines on the engine oil dipstick. If it is below
the MIN limit line, add oil up to the MAX limit.
CAUTION
· Overfilling causes overload on the engine and may cause engine dam-
age.
· Wipe out the engine oil dipstick with clean cloth. If foreign materials enter
the system, they can damage the engine.
2) Add engine oil as follows:
① Open the oil cap on top of the engine and add the genuine
engine oil.
② About 20 minutes after adding the engine oil, check the level
again to see if the oil maintains the specified level.
CAUTION
· Be careful not to have dirt and other foreign materials enter the inlet
when adding oil. It may cause engine defects.
· When adding or changing engine oil, always use the genuine engine
oil by DAEWOO. Adding or replacing with engine oil with different sub-
stances may cause negative effect on the engine.

WARNING

When checking engine oil right after driving the vehicle, oil and other
engine parts may be hot, so be cautious of burning.

11 - 4
 (3) Fluid
If the oil change interval is up or the engine oil change warning
lamp comes on, change engine oil as follows:
① After turning off the engine, drain the oil while it is warm by
unscrewing the drain plugs on the oil pan and oil filter.
Check plug ② Tighten the drain plugs securely and add engine oil through
the oil inlet.
③ Check for any oil leakage by idling the engine for several
minutes.
④ Stop the engine and wait for 20 minutes or more. Then, check

11. Inspection and Maintenance

the oil level with the oil dipstick. If checked immediately after
the engine is stopped, the oil level is shown to be lower than
Drain plug the actual level.
· Specification
- DL06K (Doosan) engine: ACEA-E5
- F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: ACEA-E3 or ACEA-E5
CAUTION - B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine: API CH-4, SAE 15W40
To completely remove water from oil, warm up the engine sufficiently Engine Change interval Oil capacity
before changing oil. Also wipe out sludge on the drain plug.
After initial 5,000km,
Capacity when changing (18ℓ),
DL06K then every 40,000 km/60,000 km
Capacity after disassembly/
(Doosan) (if the daily mileage is within 500 km,
assembly (20ℓ)
change it every 40,000 km)
Capacity when changing (11.6ℓ),
F4AE3681
At every 40,000 km Capacity after disassembly/
(IVECO)
assembly (13.1ℓ)
Capacity when changing (13ℓ),
B5.9
At every 10,000km Capacity after disassembly/
(CUMMINS)
assembly (15ℓ)

NOTE
The amount of oil is based on the assumption that the oil filter and engine
oil are replaced at the same time.

11 - 5
Engine oil filter
Engine oil filter
Replace the engine oil filter with the following procedure:
CAUTION
Make sure to use only the genuine oil filter. Any damage of the engine lubrication and cooling system caused by using an after-market filter will not be
covered by the warranty.
(1) DL06K (Doosan) engine oil filter (2) F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine oil filter
DL06K (Doosan) engine F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine

Oil filter and

cartridge

Oil filter and

cartridge

1) Tighten the engine oil filter by hand until it reaches the mounting base. 1) Tighten the engine oil filter by hand until it reaches the mounting base.
2) Tighten it further by a 3/4 turn to the specified torque (1.8 kg·m). 2) Tighten it further by a 3/4 turn to the specified torque (1.8 kg·m).
3) Open the oil cap and pour the oil with the specified grade to the 3) Open the oil cap and pour the oil with the specified grade to the
specified level. specified level.

Engine Change interval Filter Qty

At initial 5,000 km, and then every 40,000 km/60,000 km
DL06K (Doosan) 1 EA
(if the daily mileage is within 500 km, change it every 40,000 km)
F4AE3681 (IVECO) At every 40,000km 1 EA
B5.9 (Cummins) At every 10,000km 1 EA

11 - 6
(3) B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine oil filter

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Remove Install
Clean the area around the lubricating oil filter head. Use the correct oil filter
Remove the oil filter. Refer to Procedure 018-004(Cummins/Fleetguard ® Filter Specifica-
Clean the gasket surface of the filter head. tions) in Section V for oil filter part number(s).

NOTE

The O-ring can stick on the filter head. Make sure it is removed before
installing the new filter.

11 - 7
Fill the filter with clean lubrication oil before installation. Apply a light CAUTION
film of lubricating oil to the gasket sealing surface before installing
the filter. Mechanical overtightening of filter can distort the threads or damage the
filter element seal.

Install the filter on the oil filter head. Tighten the filter until the gasket
contacts the filter head surface.
Tighten 3/4 turn to 1 turn after gasket makes contact with the filter
head.

11 - 8
 Manual transmission fluid
Manual transmission fluid
ZF6S1000TO manual transmission ZF9S1110TO manual transmission S&T T110S6 manual transmission
Inlet and check plug

Vehicle
Vehicle
Rear
Front Vehicle Vehicle
Vehicle Rear Front
Vehicle
Rear Front

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Inlet and check plug Drain plug Drain plug Inlet and check plug
Drain plug

Oil in the manual transmission makes the running parts within the CAUTION
transmission smooth.
Always use the genuine oil. Use of non-genuine oil or oil with different
(1) Checking fluid level specification may damage the manual transmission while driving, caus-
After initial 1,000 km, check the oil level at every 4,000 km. If ing accidents.
the level goes below the inlet neck, add more oil.
( ) : Vehicle with PTO
(2) Fluid
· Specification Transmission Change interval Oil capacity
- Gear oil: API GL-4, SAE 80W 90
Oil change capacity: 9ℓ
- Engine oil: API CD/CE/CF/SF/SG grade, SAE30 ZF6S1000TO Capacity after disassem-
(ZF6S1000TO, ZF9S1110TO, T8S6 and T110S6 Every 60,000km bly/assembly: 9.3ℓ
transmission can be used) ZF
or yearly Oil change capacity: 8.5ℓ
ZF9S1110TO Capacity after disassem-
NOTE
bly/assembly: 8.8ℓ
· Since changing the manual transmission fluid requires additional facilities and
equipment, contact an authorized workshop and have your vehicle checked. T8S6 After initial 5,000km, 12.5ℓ (13.5ℓ)
S&T then at every
· Draining oil should be performed right after the vehicle has driven and
T110S6 40,000km 9.5ℓ (10.5ℓ)
oil is warm.

11 - 9
Automatic transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid
The automatic transmission fluid at the specified level is used for 1) Checking level
smooth and optimal performance of the automatic transmission. After the initial 1,000 km, check the fluid level at every 4,000
km. If the level goes below the inlet neck, add more fluid.
NOTE
(2) Draining oil
Since changing the automatic transmission fluid requires additional
facilities and equipment, contact an authorized workshop and have your WARNING
vehicle checked.
It is recommended to change oil always right after driving. When the oil
temperature is normal, spurting hot oil may cause burns.
CAUTION
① Open the drain plug and drain oil.
② Clean the drain plug and replace the seal.
Always use the genuine oil. Use of non-genuine oil or incorrect oil may

③ Tighten the plug to the specified torque.

damage the automatic transmission while driving, causing accidents.

1. Oil drain plug: tightening torque; T = 60 Nm

ZF automatic transmission fluid 2. Oil inlet and level point: tightening torque; T = 60 Nm

NOTE
1 2 Mark the next change schedule on the inlet.

(3) Adding oil

After adding oil through the oil inlet plug (figure 2), check it
again.
4) Checking oil
① Check the level regularly.
② Check level on level ground.
③ Do not check the oil right after driving. (The oil level can be
inaccurate.) Check it after it is cooled down below 40°C.
④ If you find that the level is below the specified level after
loosening the oil level check plug, add more oil just before
it overflows from the check plug.

11 - 10
 CAUTION 6) Type of oil
· Specification
· Low oil level may result in the breakdown of the transmission. - Gear oil: API GL-4, SAE80W90
· Every time you check the oil, check for any leakage. ( ZF6AS1000TO)
Transmission Change interval Oil capacity
Oil change capacity: 9ℓ
Every 60,000km
1 2 3 ZF ZF6AS1000TO Capacity after disas-
or yearly
sembly/assembly: 9.3ℓ

Precautions for servicing ZF automatic transmission

11. Inspection and Maintenance

• The Testman Pro (for ZF) or diagnostic device can be used for
initialization.
• After replacing the transmission, clutch, ECU, power pack, etc.,
the corresponding initialization process should be performed.
• If the initialization process is not performed after replacing the
ZF automatic transmission, the following problems can occur:
① Air bubbles can be generated in the clutch actuator.
(Definite in case of transmission removal)
② The cause of the problem ① obstructs the full stroke operation
of the push rod of the clutch actuator. As a result, shift operation
5) Transmission breathing is performed with the clutch not fully disengaged, resulting in
If the temperature increases as the transmission is being excessive clutch friction and rapid wear on the clutch facing.
used, the internal pressure also increases. The pressure is ③ In this case, the clutch facing can be peeled off due to its
adjusted by the breather valve, and therefore, make sure that heat curing.
the breather (figure 1) is not blocked by a plastic cap or other ④ Consequently, the surface of the engine flywheel can be
objects. severely damaged by the peeled clutch facing.
1. Transmission breather
CAUTION
2. Oil filler inlet
3. Transmission nameplate After servicing the ZF automatic transmission, make sure to perform the
corresponding initialization process before driving to protect the relevant
systems, including the engine, transmission, clutch and other parts.

11 - 11
Allison automatic transmission fluid
(1) Checking oil level
Check the oil level regularly. If it is below the specified level,
add or change oil.
(2) Oil
· Specification
- Gear oil: DEXRON III
(Allison 2500)

Transmission Change interval Oil capacity

Oil change capacity: 13ℓ
Every 40,000km
Allison Allison 2500 Capacity after disassembly/
or yearly
assembly: 15ℓ
Inlet and check plug

3) Checking automatic transmission fluid level

Too much or too little oil may damage the automatic transmission.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level, park the vehicle on
level ground and make sure that the engine coolant temperature is
in the normal operating range and the shift lever is set in the neutral
position. If the fluid is discolored or contaminated, change the fluid
as well as the oil filter in the automatic transmission.
CAUTION
Continuous driving with discolored or contaminated oil may damage the
automatic transmission.
Check the level as follows.
① Park the vehicle on level ground and let the engine run.
② Check it while the automatic transmission fluid temperature
is 71 - 93°C.
③ With the parking brake lever pulled and the brake pedal
depressed, move the shift lever to each position repeat-
edly for two to three times, and set it to the neutral position.
④ Pull out the dipstick, clean it, and insert it to the tube.
⑤ Pull it out again and check the oil level on the dipstick.

11 - 12
 Rear axle oil
Rear axle oil
NOTE
The fluid level should be located between the MAX and MIN limit lines
within the HOT zone of the oil gauge. If it is below the MIN limit line, add
more fluid.

WARNING
Since the automatic transmission fluid and engine parts are hot, be care-
ful not be get burned.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Drain plug
4) Adding automatic transmission fluid Inlet and
Add fluid as follows: Check plug
① Add fluid through the tube where the oil gauge is inserted.
② After adding fluid, check if the specified fluid level is being
maintained.
(1) Checking fluid level
CAUTION At the initial 1,000 km and then at every 4,000 km, check the
fluid level. If the level is below the inlet, add more fluid.
· Depending on the transmission fluid level, the automatic transmission
may result in certain defects, and therefore, make sure to maintain the (2) Fluid
specified fluid level. · Specification: API GL-5, SAE80W90
· To optimize the automatic transmission performance, always use genu-
ine DAEWOO automatic transmission fluid. Using non-genuine fluid may Axle Change interval Oil capacity
damage the automatic transmission.
FAW-S390H/T8H After initial 8,000km, 8.5ℓ
then at every
40,000km
T8H or yearly 10ℓ

11 - 13
Power steering fluid
Power steering fluid

MAX
MIN

(1) Checking fluid level (3) Changing fluid

At the initial 1,000 km and then at every 5,000 km, park the Change power steering fluid and filter if the fluid is contaminated or
vehicle with the wheels set straight ahead and check the fluid during servicing the power steering system. (Fluid capacity: 7.3ℓ)
level indicated in the oil tank. 1) With the engine stopped, lift the front wheels off the ground
(2) Fluid with a jack and unscrew two joint bolts on the bottom of the
· Specification: ATF (DEXRON II-D) steering unit loosely. Then, turn the steering wheel to the left
and right slowly to drain fluid.
2) Tighten the joint bolts and add fluid up to the specified level
through the fluid filling inlet.
3) After two to three minutes, lower the front wheels to the ground
and run the engine idle for two to three minutes.
4) Check the fluid level after idling. If the level is low, add more
fluid.
5) If there are strange sounds when operating the steering wheel
after filling fluid, bleed air.

11 - 14
 WARNING
If the cap is not completely closed while there is too much oil in the con-
tainer, the oil may overflow and damage the painted surface or cause fire.

CAUTION
· If you continue driving the vehicle with a shortage of power steering fluid,
the power steering system may become damaged.
· If power steering fluid gets on the painted surface, paint can be peeled

11. Inspection and Maintenance

off. Remove any spilled fluid with water.
· Add fluid slowly with the strainer attached in the the filling inlet of the
fluid tank. If adding fluid without the strainer, foreign materials may enter
the fluid tank.

(4) Bleeding
1) While the engine is off, lift the front wheels with a jack and
remove the air breather cap on the steering unit.
2)  Connect a plastic tube to the air breather and insert the end
of the plastic tube into a clear container.
3) After turning the steering wheel all the way to the right, loosen
the air breather and bleed air until there are no air bubbles.
After turning the steering wheel to the left, follow the same
procedure as follows:
4) After bleeding air, check the fluid level. If required, add more
fluid. Check for fluid leakage and steering wheel operation
before driving.

11 - 15
(5) Changing oil filter (6) Cleaning strainer
This oil filter is a paper type, so the filter needs to be replaced Before changing oil and oil filter, remove the strainer in the oil
with a new one when changing oil. To replace the oil filter, drain tank filling inlet, clean dirt or other foreign materials and mount
oil from the oil tank and unscrew the oil filter cap on the oil tank. it again.

CAUTION
Always use the genuine DAEWOO fluid filter. Any damage on the power
steering system caused by using after-market fluid filters in poor quality
will not be covered by the warranty.

11 - 16
 Dry air cleaner
Dry air cleaner
Type A

11. Inspection and Maintenance

(1) Cleaning and replacing air cleaner element Type B
If air flow is not smooth due to foreign materials stuck in the air
cleaner element, engine performance will be deteriorated. Check
and clean the element frequently or at every 12,000 km.

CAUTION
Replace the air cleaner element if it has been contaminated or at every
48,000 km.

(2) Cleaning
Clean it daily if you drive off-road or in an area with excessive
dirt or dust.

1) Loosen six clamps, open the air cleaner cap and remove the element.

11 - 17
2) Blow foreign materials away from the inside of the element using 3) Before mounting the element, clean the inside of the air cleaner
compressed air. body and cap thoroughly.
4) Mount the element, close the air cleaner cap and tighten six
CAUTION clamps securely to fix the air cleaner.
· The pressure of compressed air should not exceed 7 kg/cm2 (100 psi).
Blow the compressed air from the inside to the outside of the element.
CAUTION
If you blow the compressed air from the outside, foreign materials will Always use the genuine DAEWOO air cleaner element. Any damage on
contaminate the inside of the element. the engine combustion system caused by using after-market air cleaner
· Removing foreign materials by hitting the element may damage the elements will not be covered by the warranty.
element. Use compressed air only.
· If the rubber valve for removal of foreign materials is off the position,
fit a new one, not using plastic. If you block the mounting hole of the
rubber valve with plastic, it may cause excessive load on the engine
combustion and lubrication systems.

11 - 18

CAUTION
· Make sure that the element is firmly secured in the cover so that the
normal performance of the packing will prevent the inflow of foreign
materials.
· If the element fails to be correctly seated, poor matching causes inflow
of foreign materials, causing engine seizure.
(3) Replacement
It needs to be replaced more frequently based on the working
environment (dusty or sandy), its contamination level and de-
formation status. It should be replaced after 3 times of cleaning.
11. Inspection and Maintenance
(4) Be careful of the following issues during maintenance:
CAUTION
· After cleaning or replacing the element, make sure to mount the air
cleaner body and element securely and install the the clamps.
Take particular care not to omit them when replacing the internal ele-
ment.
· W
 hen washing the vehicle or raining with the cab tilted, make sure water
does not enter the air cleaner body.
If the air cleaner becomes wet, it will not only cause poor performance,
but also deteriorate the engine performance if water gets into the engine.
11 - 19
Engine fuel filter
Engine fuel filter
Replace the engine fuel filter in the following order: ⑤ Perform air bleeding.
CAUTION ⑥ After bleeding the filter, press the priming pump several times at
the engine fuel line until it becomes difficult to press the pump.
· Never smoke while replacing the fuel filter. Also do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances. And make sure not to inhale vaporized gas from the CAUTION
filter. If you do not follow these precautions, you may become injured.
Loosen the drain plug on the bottom of the primary fuel filter cartridge by
· Make sure to always use the genuine DAEWOO fuel filter. Any damage
hand and drain water from the cartridge regularly. If water is not drained,
on the engine combustion system caused by using after-market fuel
filters will not be covered by the warranty. the fuel filter may get frozen, the initial engine starting may fail in winter
or the engine may be turned off while driving.
(1) DL06K (Doosan) engine fuel filter

Priming pump

Secondary
fuel filter
Primary fuel filter and cartridge
and cartridge

Drain plug
2) Secondary fuel filter
1) Primary fuel filter ① Remove the secondary fuel filter using tools.
① Remove the primary fuel filter using tools. ② Before mounting the new secondary fuel filter, apply diesel
② Before mounting the new primary fuel filter, apply diesel or or engine oil onto the seal.
engine oil on the seal. ③ After checking if the secondary fuel filter is well connected to the
③ Tighten the primary fuel filter by hand until it touches the rubber seal and if the contact surface is clean, tighten it by hand.
mounting port. ④ After mounting it by hand, tighten it further by a 3/4 turns to
④ Tighten it further by a 3/4 turn to the specified torque (1.8 kg·m). the specified torque (1.8 kg·m).

11 - 20
(2) F4AE3681 engine fuel filter
CAUTION
Loosen the drain plug on the bottom of the primary fuel filter cartridge by
hand and drain water from the cartridge regularly. If water is not drained,
the fuel filter may get frozen, the initial engine starting may fail in winter
or the engine may be turned off while driving.

Primary fuel filter

and cartridge

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Secondary
(1) Primary fuel filter fuel filter
① Remove the primary fuel filter using tools. and cartridge
② Before mounting the new primary fuel filter, apply diesel or
engine oil on the seal.
③ Tighten the primary fuel filter by hand until it touches the
mounting port.
④ Tighten it further by a 3/4 turn to the specified torque (1.8 kg·m).
⑤ Perform air bleeding.
(2) Secondary fuel filter
① Remove the secondary fuel filter using tools.
⑥ After bleeding the filter, press the priming pump several times at
② Before mounting the new secondary fuel filter, apply diesel
the engine fuel line until it becomes difficult to press the pump.
or engine oil onto the seal.
CAUTION ③ After checking if the secondary fuel filter is well connected to the
rubber seal and if the contact surface is clean, tighten it by hand.
④ After mounting it by hand, tighten it further by a 3/4 turns to
When changing the cartridge, the fuel should not have been filled in
advance. It is for preventing foreign materials, which may damage the
system components and injector pump, from entering the fuel system the specified torque (1.8 kg·m).
while fuel is circulated in the circuit.

11 - 21
(3) B5.9 Engine fuel filter

Priming pump

1st Fuel filter & Cartridge

Drain plug

1) 1st fuel filter 2) 2nd fuel filter

1. Remove the 1st fuel filter by tool. Fuel Filter(Spin-On Type)
2. Please dipped in engine oil seal before replacing the new - Preparatory steps
primary fuel filter
3. Until the gasket contacts the surface of bracket, lock the 1st WARNING
filter by hand. Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal
4. Please tighten 3/4 turn to the specified torque(1.8kg.m) injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries.
5. Bleeding the air To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable
6. Please bleed the air in fuel line on the engine side until the pump first and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
does not been pressed.
CAUTION · Disconnect the batteries.

Loosen the drain plug at the bottom of the fuel filter cartridge by hand
regularly, please pull out the water inside the cartridge. If water if you have
to pull the fuel filter freezing, not starting, engine off while driving can cause.

11 - 22
 11. Inspection and Maintenance
Drain Remove
If equipped, use the filter drain valve to drain fuel out of the filter for Clean the area around the fuel filter head.
approximately 5 seconds. This will eliminate fuel from running over
the top of the filter upon removal

WARNING

Drain the fuel-water separator into a container, and dispose of contents

in accordance with local environmental regulations.

11 - 23
Remove the fuel filter. Install
Fill the new filter(s) with clean diesel fuel.
WARNING
WARNING
Fuel is flammable. Keep all cigarettes, flames, pilot lights, arcing equip-
ment, and switches out of the work area and areas sharing ventilation to Fuel is flammable. Keep all cigarettes, flames, pilot lights, arcing equip-
reduce the possibility of severe personal injury or death when working ment, and switches out of the work area and areas sharing ventilation to
on the fuel system. reduce the possibility of severe personal injury or death when working
on the fuel system.

CAUTION
When pre-filling the filter do not pour fuel down the center (clean side) of
the filter. Pour clean fuel into the outer openings (dirty side) of the filter. Use
a clean side block off plug, if available, to prevent fuel from entering the
clean side of the filter. Pre-filling on the clean side of the filter can result in
debris entering the fuel system and damaging fuel system components.

11 - 24

Lubricate the seal with clean lubricating engine oil.
11. Inspection and Maintenance
Install the fuel filter on the fuel filter head. Turn the filter until the
gasket contacts the filter head surface.
Tighten the fuel filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn after the
gasket contacts the fuel filter head surface, or as specified by the
fuel filter manufacturer.
CAUTION
Mechanical overtightening can distort the threads as well as damage the
filter element seal or filter can.
11 - 25
Connect the batteries
WARNING
Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal
injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries.
To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable
first and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
11 - 26
- Prime
General information
Controlled venting is provided at the injection pump through the
fuel drain manifold. Small amounts of air introduced by changing
the filters or injection pump supply line will be vented automatically
if the fuel filter is changed in accordance with instructions.
 Bleeding fuel system
Bleeding fuel system for DL06K and F4AE3681 engines
When the fuel feed pump was removed for cleaning the fuel filter or the engine is stopped due to insufficient fuel, air bleeding must be performed.
(1) Fuel injection system
High-pressure fuel from the high-pressure pump is stored in the common rail, and the injection timing and injection amount are calculated
based on the data programmed in the ECU by the driver. At this point, the ECU activates the solenoid valves on the injectors installed
on each engine cylinder for fuel injection.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

(2) Fuel line bleeding procedure
To bleed the fuel line, loosen the fuel feed pipe between the secondary fuel filter and the high pressure fuel pump a bit and run the
priming pump on the primary fuel filter manually until no air bubbles are present.

11 - 27
How to bleed fuel system for B5.9 engine
Flow Diagram
Automotive Applications

Flow Diagram
Automotive Applications
1. Fuel from supply tank 2. Prefilter or screen 3. Fuel lift pump 4. Fuel/water separator 5. Fuel filter
6. Low-pressure fuel line 7. Turbocharger boost control line 8. Bosch® P7100 injection pump
9. Bosch® rotary injection pump 10. Fuel drain manifold 11. High-pressure fuel line
12. Bosch® 7-mm closed-nozzle, hole-type injectors 13. Fuel return to supply tank.

11 - 28

Prime
General information
Controlled venting is provided at the injection pump through the
fuel drain manifold. Small amounts of air introduced by changing
the filters or injection pump supply line will be vented automatically
if the fuel filter is changed in accordance with instructions.
11. Inspection and Maintenance
However, manual bleeding will be required if one of the following
conditions exists:
• The fuel filter is not filled prior to installation
• The fuel injection pump is replaced
• The high-pressure fuel line connections are loosened, or the
lines are replaced.
• It is an initial engine start-up or start-up after an extended period
of no engine operation.
Refer to procedure 006-015 (Fuel Filter (Spin-On)) in Section 6 for
proper venting of the low pressure side of the fuel system.
Refer to the procedure 005-012 (Fuel injection Pumps, in Line) in
Section 5 to determine if venting the fuel pump is necessary. Or refer
to Procedure 005-014 (Fuel Injection Pumps, Rotary) In Section 5
to determine if venting the fuel pump is necessary.
Refer to Procedure 006-051 Injector Supply Lines (High Pressure)
in Section 6 for venting of the high pressure side of the fuel system.
11 - 29
Air can also be vented through the fuel drain manifold line by operat- Low pressure Fuel line(s)
ing the starting motor.
NOTE
CAUTION For engines equipped with distributor type pumps equipped with bleed
It is necessary to turn the key switch to the ON position. Because the screws.
engine can start, be sure to follow all safety precautions. Use the normal
engine starting procedure. Open the bleed screw.

CAUTION
When using the starting motor to vent the system, do not engage the
starter for more than 30 seconds, or starter damage will occur. Wait 2
minutes before starting the engine again.
NOTE
If the engine is not equipped with a bleed screw, loosen the fitting on the
low pressure supply line to the injection pump. Once priming has been
completed, tighten the fitting to the specified torque.

11 - 30
 Fuel tank/Changing engine coolant
Fuel tank
Flush the inside of the fuel tank and drain the deposits thoroughly
at every 24,000 km.
CAUTION
· Cleanness is very important when fueling. Contaminated fuel can dam-
age the fuel system or wear the injection pump and nozzle rapidly. Make
sure to remove sludge in the fuel tank regularly.
· Fuel leakage will cause a risk of fire.
Changing engine coolant
11. Inspection and Maintenance
When changing coolant, remove the water drain cocks from the
radiator and engine and the plug from the oil cooler cover to drain
water. After draining water completely, fit the cocks, add coolant, run
the engine for approx. 10 minutes and check the condition again. If
anti-freeze is used, flush the inside of the radiator and water jacket
twice a year, in spring and fall.
· Specification: EDS M-8207 · Anti-freeze mixture ratio: 50%
CAUTION
· After changing coolant, check for any leakage.
· Using only water or not using anti-freeze will result in corrosion of the
engine and cooling system, degrading the service life of the engine.
Always use the genuine DAEWOO anti-freeze.
· Make sure to follow the coolant and coolant filter replacement interval. If the
replacement interval is not followed, key engine parts, such as the water
pump and cylinder block, may become corroded and the radiator may leak.
11 - 31
Checking and adjusting clutch
Checking and adjusting clutch

Mounting nut
Push rod

The free play of the clutch pedal should be checked at every 10,000 (2) Adjusting free play
km. If the free play is out of the specified range, adjust it as follows: 1) Adjusting master cylinder
· Standard clutch pedal play: approx. 3 mm ① Loosen the push rod mounting nut.
(1) Checking free play ② Tighten the push rod so that it touches the piston gently.
Push the clutch pedal gently by hand to check the free move- Then, loosen the push rod by 1/2 turns (about 0.5 mm)
ment between the push rod of the clutch master cylinder and and fasten the mounting nut.
the piston.

11 - 32
 CAUTION
Adjusting the pedal play can affect the clutch performance. Therefore,
the pedal play should be adjusted only by a DAEWOO service center.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

2) Adjusting booster
Since the booster is automatically adjusted, only the clutch
master cylinder's free play needs to be adjusted.

11 - 33
Checking and adjusting brake
Checking and adjusting brake
If the distance between the brake lining and drum becomes larger due to wear on the brake lining, the brake effect will be greatly degraded.
Therefore, check this distance and wear condition of the lining regularly (initially at 1,000 km, then at every 4,000 km).
CAUTION
Check the amount of brake lining wear through the dust cover check hole. Also, apply grease onto the slack adjuster regularly.

(1) Checking brake lining wear (2) Automatic lining adjuster

 The wear status of the brake lining can be checked through The automatic lining adjuster performs automatic adjustment of
the inspection hole on the dust cover easily. the clearance based on the brake lining wear.

CAUTION Items All vehicle models

If the cross section of the lining is semicircular, the lining is over the Lining Front wheel
0.6 - 0.8 mm
wear limit. Check if the lining is over the wear limit frequently and have clearance Rear wheel
it replaced by your authorized workshop as necessary.

11 - 34
 Bleeding clutch system
Bleeding clutch system
CAUTION
During the initial driving duration, smoke may be produced in the brake lin- MAX
ing's bed-in process, which causes no problem in the braking performance MIN
of the vehicle. However, avoid operating the brake system excessively
during the initial driving period.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

(1) Add brake oil to the clutch oil tank up to the specified level.

CAUTION
Add clutch oil as necessary so that the clutch oil level does not fall below
the specified level during bleeding work.

11 - 35
 MAX
MIN

(2)  After removing the rubber cap and connecting a plastic pipe to
the bleeding screw (breather), insert the other end of the plastic
pipe to a clear container.
(3) Depress the clutch pedal several times, and keep the pedal
depressed.
(4) Turn air bleeding screw (breather) by a half turn, and as soon
as the clutch oil mixed with air flows out, immediately tighten
the bleeding screw (breather) back.
(5) Repeat the above procedure until there is no air bubble on the
flowing clutch oil.
(6) After completing bleeding, check the pedal free play and the
clutch operation. Also, check if the clutch oil in the clutch oil tank
is up to the specified level.

11 - 36
 Checking tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure Tire specification
② ③
① ④
Normal ⑦ 70R19.5
⑤⑥
2 65 /
S
E L ES
UB

T
0K

16
Insufficient

11. Inspection and Maintenance

M+

⑧
S

Excessive

① 265 : Cross section width (mm) ⑤ 160 : Load index

Check the tire inflation pressure while the tire is cooled down. ② 70 : Flatness ratio ⑥ K : Speed index
③ R : Radial tire ⑦ TUBELESS
④ 19.5 : Rim diameter ⑧ M + S : All season tire
WARNING
If the inflation pressure is insufficient or excessive, the tire may be dam-
aged while driving, causing accidents. WARNING

CAUTION Defects caused by the installation of tires out of the specifications will
not be covered by DAEWOO. Make sure to use tires with the correct
· The inflation pressure of the spare tire should be higher than the standard. specifications only.
If its installation is needed, adjust it to the standard inflation pressure.
· Using radial tires and bias tires together in one vehicle may play a nega-
tive effect on safe driving, and therefore it is not recommended.
· Make the inflation pressure of the inside and outside double tires identical.
· Check if the tire air valve caps are securely tightened.

11 - 37
Standard tire inflation pressure Checking tire wear condition
Tire specification Standard tire inflation pressure

Kumho: 8.1kg/cm2(115PSI)
265/70R19.5-14PR
Hankook: 7.7kg/cm2(110PSI)

245/70R19.5-18PR Kumho: 8.79kg/cm2(125PSI)

Kumho: 7.7kg/cm2(110PSI)
245/70R19.5-14PR
Hankook : 7.7kg/cm2(110PSI)

Kumho: 8.4kg/cm2(120PSI)
295/80R22.5-16PR
Hankook: 8.6kg/cm2(122PSI)
Wear limit

NOTE
As for the tire specification, check the tire surface mounted on the vehicle.
Once the tire tread reaches the wear limit, make sure to replace
the tire.
If the tread reaches the wear limit, the thread is left for 3.2 mm.

WARNING
If tires worn out over the specified value are used continuously, the brak-
ing distance will become longer, and steering will become more difficult,
resulting in accidents.

11 - 38
Tire rotation

3 1
8
5
6
7
2 4

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Tire wheel nut loosening direction
(counterclockwise: left)

The amount of tire wear can be different depending on the mount- ● Take the following precautions when rotating tires.
ing location, loading, road condition, and use of brakes. To ensure ① All wheel pin nuts for the right and left sides are a right-hand
even wear on each tire, perform tire rotation regularly (usually at screw type. Therefore, when loosening the tire wheel nuts,
every 5,000 km). turn them “counterclockwise (left).”
WARNING
For a new vehicle or after replacing a tire, make sure to retighten the
wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque after initial 50 to 100 km and
1,000 km of driving. Then, tighten them at every 4,000 km. Otherwise,
tires can be detached, resulting in a serious injury or property damage.
Particularly, vehicles attached with additional axles (pusher and tag)
without permission need to be checked with the wheel nut tightening
condition before and after driving.
※ Specified wheel nut tightening torque - Front wheel/rear wheel (8 stud
type): M22 (55 - 65 kg·m)

11 - 39
Front wheel jack point Rear wheel jack point

② The mounting location of the front wheel oil jack is shown in ③ The mounting location of the rear wheel oil jack is shown in
the above figure. the above figure.

11 - 40
Tire rotation by vehicle model
CAUTION
※ Precautions when checking tires and wheels
· In order to maintain the characteristics of the vehicle, use tires with the
same specifications and by the same make.
3 · Before driving, make sure to check inflation pressure and wear of tires.
· The tire inflation pressure and wheel nut tightness should be checked
frequently. Particularly, before long-distance driving, check the inflation
1 pressure and tire wheel nut tightness as well while checking the vehicle
2

11. Inspection and Maintenance

condition.
- 4×2 vehicle If using non-standard tires, the steering wheel cannot be operated
① Front wheel (1-axle)
properly, fuel consumption is increased, and the vehicle driving system

② Rear wheel (2-axle)

or braking system can malfunction. Also, steering wheel vibration and

③ Spare tire
uneven wear of tires can occur at a high speed. Always use standard
tires from the same company.
· Installing non-standard tires or recycled tires will void the warranty.
· Before driving, always check tires and wheels. Damaged wheels may
reduce tire inflation pressure and damage tires.
· If the tires were hit by a stone or made impact with other objects while
driving, have the tires checked by an authorized workshop or a tire spe-
cialist. Damaged wheels may cause a risk of accidents while mounting
tires or driving.

WARNING
Excessive heat generated by fire, brake malfunction, wheel bearing dam-
age or other reasons weakens metal and may result in the explosion of
the wheel-tire assembly. Such explosive accidents of the wheels and tires
may cause serious injuries or death. Therefore, all wheels exposed to
excessive heat should be checked, removed, and disposed of by an au-
thorized workshop. Also any deformation of the wheels should be checked
before mounting. No combustible material should be used on the contact
surface between the tire and wheel, such as wheel rims or bead seats.

11 - 41
Greasing points
Grease application on each grease nipple
Using a grease pump, apply grease at every 5,000 km.

Bottom of
kingpin

1) Kingpin 3) Spring pin and shackle pin

2) Steering column, inside of the spline shaft 4) Front chamber bracket and slack adjuster

11 - 42
 11. Inspection and Maintenance
5) Rear chamber bracket and slack adjuster (7) PTO drive shaft

6) Propeller shaft, universal joint and sliding sleeve

11 - 43
Grease application on front hub and rear hub - vehicle with drum brake (insulation hub bearing)

Front hub Rear hub

1) Front hub 2) Rear hub

When replacing the brake lining, remove the remaining deformed When replacing the brake lining, remove the remaining deformed
grease in the front hub bearing after removing the front hub, and grease in the rear hub bearing after removing the rear hub, and
fill new clean grease. At this point, make sure to replace the oil fill new clean grease. At this point, make sure to replace the oil
seal in the front hub. seals (inside and outside) in the rear hub.

11 - 44
Chassis greasing points by vehicle model

② ⑦ ④⑥ ⑧ ⑦ ⑩ ⑦ ⑨ ⑩

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① ⑦ ③⑤ ⑧ ⑦ ⑩ ⑪ ⑦ ⑨ ⑩

(1) 4x2 vehicle chassis greasing points

① Bracket support cap-suspension upper part (left) ⑤ Kingpin lower part (left) ⑨ Spring bracket
② Bracket support cap-suspension upper part (right) ⑥ Kingpin lower part (right) ⑩ Shackle
③ Kingpin upper part (left) ⑦ Spring pin (front) ⑪ Propeller shaft, universal join and
④ Kingpin upper part (right) ⑧ Transmission release bearing sliding sleeve

11 - 45
Air dryer

Air tank

Air dryer

※The mounting location for parts may differ by vehicle models. CAUTION
The air dryer should be replaced only by a certified technician.

11 - 46
 ● Air dryer replacement
1) Removing air dryer
① Discharge air from the air tank.
② Remove the pipes from the air dryer inlet and outlet.
③ Unscrew the mounting bolts to remove the air dryer.
2) Cleaning pipe and surroundings
Clean the inside and surroundings of the pipe at the inlet connected to the air compressor and remove foreign materials or replace
it with a clean pipe so as to prevent foreign materials from entering the air dryer.
3) Installing new air dryer

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Assemble the air dryer in the reverse order of disassembly.
(③ → ② → ①)

CAUTION

· If foreign materials enter the air dryer, the brake may not work normally, causing accidents.
If foreign materials, such as carbon residue, on the inlet pipe enter the air drier during replacement work, they can cause malfunction. To prevent foreign
materials from entering the air drier, clean the pipe thoroughly or replace it with a new clean one.
· The pressure of the governor valve, which is attached to the air drier, is preset according to the vehicle, so it should not be adjusted. Before using the
air drier, make sure to confirm that the pressure value indicated on its filter cartridge is matched with the operating pressure of the vehicle. (Adjusting
the governor valve without approval will void the warranty.)
Example) DAEWOO truck operating pressure: 8.5±0.2 bar (8.3 - 8.7 bar)
The pressure may differ by vehicle models. Make sure to check the specified pressure of the vehicle before replacing it.
· To ensure normal dehumidification performance of the air dryer, the filter cartridge should be replaced ever year or at every 50,000 km.
· When purchasing a filter cartridge, make sure to check if it is a genuine part.

11 - 47
Air compressor
Checking air compressor
(1) Function of air compressor (4) Measures for air compressor malfunction while driving
The air compressor is installed to the engine to generate If the air compressor malfunctions or the air system is dam-
compressed air for the main brake (brake pedal), parking aged so that the air tank pressure drops to a dangerous level
brake, suspension, and other parts. (5.3 bar), the brake system warning lamp ( 1 / 2 ) will come
on and an alarm will sound.
(2) Air compressor maintenance interval
• DL06K (Doosan) engine: at every 48,000 km CAUTION
• F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: at every 48,000 km
· If the brake system warning lamp comes on with an alarm, stop the
• B5.9 (Cummins) engine: at every 10,000 km
vehicle immediately at a safe place using the main brake (brake pedal)
and the parking brake lever and check the brake system.
CAUTION
· Even if the air pressure is used up completely, you can stop the vehicle
For safe driving, make sure to perform regular maintenance checkup using the parking brake lever.
based on the maintenance schedule.

(3) Checking air compressor

With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal fully
for 4 to 5 times to use up all the air. Then, check if the air
compressor is operated so the air pressure is build up to
7.8 - 8.5 kg/cm2 again.

WARNING

If the air pressure fails to be charged to the normal level (7.8 - 8.5 kg/cm2),
never drive the vehicle and have it checked by an authorized workshop. If
you drive the vehicle without normal air pressure, the brake performance
will be deteriorated, causing accidents.

11 - 48
 Checking wiper operation and replacing wiper blade
Checking wiper operation
CAUTION
· Oil or wax on the wiper blades will cause abnormal operating noise or
poor cleaning performance.
· Damaged wiper blades may scratch the glass surface.
· If you activate the wipers without washer fluid when it's not raining, the
wiper blades or windshield surface can be damaged due to dirt or sand
on the glass.
· If you open the front inspection panel with the wipers up, the front

11. Inspection and Maintenance

inspection panel and the wipers may be damaged.
· Be careful not to activate the wiper arms with the wiper blades detached
or removed as the wiper arms, if made contact to the windshield, may
damage the windshield.

Check the condition of the wipers regularly. If any wear or cracks are
found on the wiper or the wiper cannot clean the windshield properly
under a normal condition, replace the wiper blades.
● Wiper blade specification
WARNING
· If the wipers are malfunctioning or not working, it will obstruct driving
severely when it's raining or snowing. When it's raining or snowing and
the wipers are not working or malfunctioning, never drive the vehicle.
· If you grab the wiper arms or put your hands close to the running part,
you may be injured by moving wipers.

Wiper
Driver's side Passenger's side
24" 24"

11 - 49
Removing wiper blade

Wiper arm

Fixing lever
Wiper blade

① Turn the wiper switch to the OFF position. ④ While pushing the blade downward, remove the blade from the
② Pull the wiper arm up so that you can replace the wiper blades. wiper arm in the arrow direction.
③ While holding the blade with one hand, push the blade fixing lever
with the other hand and remove the blade from the fixing part.

11 - 50
Mounting wiper blade

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① Place the new wiper blade horizontally and face the fixing lever ② Pull the wiper blade and mount it so that the fixing lever is en-
down. Then, align the fixing lever groove to the wiper arm. gaged with the wiper arm.
③ Pull the wiper arm down.

11 - 51
Focusing headlamp/lamp replacement and lamp type
Focusing headlamps
CAUTION
The leveling angle is related to safety and should not be adjusted with-
out approval. If its adjustment is required, use an authorized workshop
equipped with the adjustment equipment.

Lamp replacement and lamp type

When replacing bulbs for each lamp, refer to the following proce-
dure and always use bulbs with specified capacity.
① Remove the lamp by loosening the lens mounting screws.
② Push the bulb straight and turn it left to remove it from the
socket and insert a new bulb.
① When replacing bulbs or removing the headlamps, make sure ③ When replacing bulbs for halogen lamps (headlamps or fog
to focus the headlamps. lamps), do not hold the surface of the new bulb with bare hands
② To focus the headlamps, use the headlamp tester or focusing or gloves. If you touch the surface of a new bulb with bare
machine. hands or gloves, the service life of the bulb may be reduced.
Instead, always hold the rear part (terminal).
High beam Up/Down
High beam
LH/RH
Low beam WARNING
Up/Down
· If you touch the lamp when it is on, you may be burned. Turn it off and
wait until the lamp cools down before starting working.
· Using non-standard lamps can damage the related parts and cause a
fire. Make sure to use the standard lamps only.

Low beam
LH/RH

③ Adjust the focus of the headlamp with four bolts.

11 - 52
 Lamp bulb specification and inspection
Lamp bulb specification Lamp bulb inspection
① Turn ON/OFF each lamp switch and check the cor-
Lamps Capacity Type Quantity Remark
responding lamp is turned on or off.
High beam ② If the lamp does not come on, check the corresponding
70W
(H1) fuse.
Head-
③ If the fuse is defective, replace it.
Halogen 2
lamp Low beam
④ If the fuse is OK, check the bulb. If it is defective,
Front 70W
Combi- (H7)
nation
Turn signal lamp 21W Single-bulb type 2 replace it.
⑤ If the bulb is OK, have it checked by an authorized
Lamp
Position lamp 5W Single-bulb type 2

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Fog lamp 70W Halogen 2
workshop.

Rear ①Turn signal lamp 25W Single-bulb type 2 WARNING

Combi-
1 2 3
②Brake/Tail lamp
nation
Lamp
25/10 W Assembly type 2 Using non-standard lamps can damage the related parts
and cause a fire. Make sure to use the standard lamps only.
Large room lamp 27W Fluorescent lamp 1

5W Single-bulb type 1 Flexible reading lamp CAUTION

Reading lamp
10W Single-bulb type 1 On bed control module
· Before replacing the lamp, make sure to disconnect the
Room Focus lamp 0.5W LED lamp 2 Semi-permanent negative (-) terminal or remove the ignition key.
Lamp
Door ajar warning · When removing the lamp cover, do not apply too much force.
5W Single-bulb type 2
lamp If the lamp cover is damaged, it cannot be used again.
Door step lamp 5W Single-bulb type 2 · Before replacing the lamp, make sure to set the correspond-
ing lamp switch and ignition switch in the OFF position.
Compartment lamp 10W Single-bulb type 2 Compartment box
· If you touch the lamp when it is on, you may be burned. Turn it
Auxiliary turn signal lamp 21/5W Single-bulb type 2 off and wait until the lamp cools down before starting working.
Upper end indicator 10W Single-bulb type 2 On exterior sun-visor · If touching the lamp with bare hands or oily hands, the lamp
is contaminated, degrading its brightness. Also, its service
Backup lamp 21W Single-bulb type 2
life can be shortened and its bulb can be damaged. In this
License plate lamp 12W Single-bulb type 2 case, clean its glass with soft cloth.
Work lamp - - - Premium model

11 - 53
Fuse and relay
To protect electric devices used in the vehicle, the fuse box is equipped in the battery box in the cabin and outside of the vehicle.
If certain electric device is not working, check the related fuse first.

Cabin fuse and relay box Auxiliary fuse and relay box (next to battery)
(fuse box on passenger's side)
Type A Type B

The auxiliary fuse and relay box is installed next to the battery,
The cabin fuse and relay box is installed on the passenger's side. To located outside of the vehicle.
check the fuses and relays, open the cover of the fuse box.
NOTE
CAUTION
Attached on the fuse and relay box is the fuse and relay map label. When
· Check fuses and relays at a place where there is no traffic. a fuse is blown, refer to the map and replace the fuse or relay.
· If a certain electric device is not working, check the corresponding fuse first.
If the fuse is blown, replace it with a genuine fuse with the same capacity.
· To protect electric devices, take out the blown fuse while the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
· When replacing the blown fuse, make sure to replace it with a specified
DAEWOO's fuse of the same capacity.
· If the fuse continues to blow after replacement, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized workshop.

11 - 54
 Opening cabin fuse and relay box (fuse box on passenger's side)

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① The cabin fuse and relay box is installed
on the passenger's side.
② Loosen two mounting screws of the
glove box by turning them counterclock-
wise for 90 degrees.
③ Loosen two mounting screws of the ④ Remove the glove box cover.
glove box by turning them counter- ⑤ Install in the reverse order of removal.
clockwise for 90 degrees.

11 - 55
Checking and replacing fuse
① After turning off all electric devices, remove the ignition key.
② Open the cover of the cabin and exterior battery boxes.
③ Check the corresponding fuse by referring to the fuse and relay
map label attached on the inside of the fuse and relay box cover.
④ Using the fuse puller in the cabin fuse box cover, remove the
corresponding fuse.
⑤ Check if the center of the fuse is cut off.
⑥ If the fuse is normal, place it back to the original place.
⑦ If the fuse is blown or cut off, check the fuse capacity shown
above the fuse and replace it with a specified fuse with the
same capacity.
11 - 56
Normal Blown
WARNING
· If you use a steel wire, copper wire or aluminum foil, instead of a fuse
with the specified capacity, electric devices can be damaged or it can
cause a fire.
· To protect electric devices in the vehicle and prevent a fire, always use
a fuse with the specified capacity. Do not use a fuse with higher capacity
than the specified in the fuse and relay box.
NOTE
Spare fuses are located in the fuse and relay box. After using a spare
fuse, make sure to add more spare fuses in the box.
Cabin fuse and relay box (fuse box on passenger's side) map

11. Inspection and Maintenance

11 - 57
Auxiliary fuse and relay box (next to battery) map

11 - 58
 Checking exterior lamps
Front lamp Rear lamp

③
②
④ ①

11. Inspection and Maintenance

⑤
① ② ③
④

① High beam ① Turn signal lamp

② Low beam ② Brake/Tail lamp
③ Turn signal lamp ③ Backup lamp
④ Position lamp ④ License plate lamp
⑤ Fog lamp

11 - 59
Replacing exterior lamp
Removing headlamp Replacing headlamp bulb

High beam (H1) Low beam (H7)

① Turn the lamp switch and ignition switch to the OFF position.
② Tilt the cab and remove two 10 mm nuts.
③ Pull the headlamp forward to remove it.
④ Remove six mounting bolts inside the headlamp to remove it
completely.
① With the headlamp removed, remove the headlamp cover.
② Remove the bulb mounting clip and harness.
③ Remove the bulb from the connector and replace it with a new
bulb.
④ Install in the reverse order of removal.

WARNING
Since the angle may affect safe driving, do not adjust the angle adjust-
ing screw on the side of the headlamp without approval when replacing
the bulb.

CAUTION
The headlamp should removed by an authorized workshop.

11 - 60
Replacing turn signal lamp/position lamp bulb
Turn signal
lamp
Position
lamp
① Disconnect the turn signal lamp and position lamp connectors
by unscrewing them.
② Remove the bulb from the mounting port by unscrewing it.
③ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
④ Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Since replacement of headlamp, turn signal lamp or position lamp bulb
requires removal of the headlamp, have the work performed by an au-
thorized workshop.
Replacing fog lamp bulb
11. Inspection and Maintenance
① Turn the lamp switch and ignition switch to the OFF position.
② Disconnect the fog lamp connector by turning it.
③ Remove the bulb from the mounting port by unscrewing it.
④ Replace it with a new one. At this point, make sure not to have
finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of the bulb
and use clean and thin gloves.
CAUTION
Since replacement of the fog lamp bulb should be performed under the
vehicle, have the work performed by an authorized workshop.
11 - 61
Replacing rear combination lamp/Backup Replacing license plate lamp bulb
lamp bulb

① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.

① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position. ② Turn the bulb connector to remove the bulb housing.
② Remove four rear combination lamp mounting bolts. ③ Remove the bulb by pulling it upward.
③ Disconnect the main connector and remove the rear combina- ④ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
tion lamp. to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
④ For the tail lamp/brake lamp and turn signal lamp, remove their the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
bulbs from their housings by pushing and unscrewing it. For the ⑤ Install in the reverse order of removal.
backup lamp, pull out the bulb from the housing to remove it.
⑤ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
⑥ Install in the reverse order of removal.

11 - 62
 Replacing interior lamps
Front room lamp Cargo compartment room lamp
(for vehicle with sleeper cab)

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.
② Remove the lamp cover by covering the blade of a flat-bladed ① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.
screwdriver with cloth and inserting it to the lamp cover groove. ② Remove the lamp by covering the blade of a flat-bladed screw-
③ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not driver with cloth and inserting it to the lamp groove.
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of ③ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
④ Slide the cover in to install it.
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
④ Slide the cover in to install it.
CAUTION
When removing the cover, make sure that it is not damaged.

11 - 63
Door ajar warning lamp/Door step lamp
Door ajar warning lamp
Door
step lamp
① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.
② Remove the door trim and remove the lens.
③ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
④ Mount the lens by pushing it in.
11 - 64
Flexible reading lamp
① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.
② Loosen the bolts on the rear cover of the lamp.
③ Separate the front cover of the lamp and remove the lamp as-
sembly.
④ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
⑤ Mount the cover by pushing it in.
Reading lamp: on bed control module

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① Set the ignition switch in the OFF position.
② Remove the lamp cover by covering the blade of a flat-bladed
screwdriver with cloth and inserting it to the lamp cover groove.
③ Replace the bulb with a new one. At this point, make sure not
to have finger prints or foreign materials get on the surface of
the bulb and use clean and thin gloves.
④ Slide the cover in to install it.

CAUTION
When removing or installing the lamp, set the lamp from wirings as far
as possible since wirings can be melted by heat from bulbs.

11 - 65
BCM (Body Control Module)/ABS ECU/DC-DC converter

· Body control
It is responsible for various functions, including the wiper INT control function, power window control function, turn signal
lamp control function, timer room lamp function, automatic door lock control function, lamp (headlamp/fog lamp) control
function, work lamp control function, mirror/fuel control function, transmission blocking function, and start motor control
function.

11 - 66
 Battery maintenance (semi-permanent MF battery)
Checking battery
CAUTION
1. B
 efore disconnecting the battery terminals, make sure to turn the igni-
tion switch to the OFF position.
2. N
 ever disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running as
it may cause severe damage to electric devices.
3. Ignition failure due to discharged battery
(Due to poor contact of the fusible link, mounted at the back of the al-
ternator, current generated by the alternator is not stored in the battery)

11. Inspection and Maintenance

① If the battery is discharged, make sure to check the fusible link
contact condition mounted at the back of the alternator.
② After inspecting the fusible link contact condition, check the alterna-
tor charging condition again.

WARNING
(1) The maintenance-free (MF) batteries require no regular main-
1. If keeping using the battery with insufficient electrolyte, an excessive
tenance if used normally.
amount of electrolytic gas is generated, leading to possible explosion.
(2) Check the charging condition via the charging indicator. Never use the battery if its electrolyte is insufficient.
Charging Charging 2. W
 hen charging the battery, explosive flammable gas is generated.
Required action Keep flames, sparks and static electricity away from the battery and
indicator status
avoid a short circuit between terminals.
Green Normal state Usage
Battery charge
Black Charge the battery
low
Clear Fluid low Replace the battery

(3) When the vehicle is stored for an extended period of time,

turn on the engine at every five days to charge the battery.

11 - 67
Precautions for electric welding or drilling on Cautions when handling battery
vehicle body or frame

① Make sure that the function of chassis components are never

damaged while welding or drilling.
② Particularly, make sure to prevent any damage on the braking system,
pipes, wirings and security parts as it may cause serious accidents.
③ Also if building a body on the front side frames or the area where
the chassis number is stamped, make sure that the chassis
number can be identified from the side of the vehicle. CAUTION

CAUTION
To prevent damage on electronic devices, when performing electric welding,
take the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the negative (-) and positive (+) terminals on the battery and cover
them up.
3. Disconnect the connectors for all control units.
4. Make sure to place the ground of the welding machine closer to the part
to be welded.
CAUTION
When performing electric welding on the vehicle body or frame, make sure
to disconnect the negative and positive cables from the battery as well as all
control unit connectors in advance. If they are not disconnected, electronic
control units, such as the ECU, TCU, BCM, meters can be severely damaged.
1. Wipe out any blue rust on the battery terminals thoroughly with soft
brush and baking powder. Then, clean them with warm water and apply
Vaseline or grease on them.
2. Do not leave the battery in a place where there is a risk of flames or
sparks.
3. If the battery electrolyte makes contact to clothing, vehicle body or
skin, wipe it out immediately with water.
4. When working on or near the battery, take off the watch or ring and be
careful with handling tools.
5. When installing a battery on the vehicle, do not tilt the battery more
than 45°.

11 - 68
(1) If the vehicle is not used for a long time, the battery may become discharged. Please consider to disconnect the battery cable. Open
the battery cover and disconnect the red-taped connector (PIN 1). (Perform this with the ignition switch OFF.)
(2) For every ignition switch cycle, the engine should be run at least for approx. 30 minutes to maintain the battery charging state. (The
battery should be charged separately if the cycle time is less than 30 minutes.)
(3) How to disconnect battery cable for welding
Welding can affect electric components that have internal power severely. Therefore, disconnect the battery cables as shown in the
figure below before welding.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

(under normal condition) (when welding)

CAUTION
Before welding, make sure to detach the positive (+) and negative (-) cables of the battery and cross them as shown in the figure.

11 - 69

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started by con-
necting the battery to another vehicle's battery or an auxiliary battery.
(1) Precaution when connecting jumper cables
WARNING
Make a full understanding of, and comply with, the following precautions. If
not, the battery may explode, causing vehicle damage and severe injuries
or the electric devices of both vehicles may get damaged.
·  The battery from another vehicle or an auxiliary battery for jump
starting should be 24 V.
·  Do not expose the battery to cigarettes or sparks.
·  Make sure that no one else touches the cable terminals.
· Turn off all electric devices such as an audio system.
11 - 70
(2) Starting engine with jumper cables
Use the following procedure:
① Pull the parking brake lever.
② Set the shift lever to the neutral position for manual trans-
mission vehicles.
③ Turn off all electrical devices.
④ Connect the positive (+) terminal of the normal battery to
the positive terminal of the discharged battery with the
jumper cable.
⑤ Connect the negative(-) terminal of the normal battery to the
chassis frame near the battery bracket of the discharged
vehicle with a jumper cable.
⑥ Turn on the engine of the normal vehicle and turn on the
engine of the discharged vehicle.
⑦ Once the engine starts, disconnect the jumper cable from
the negative (-) terminal first.
⑧ After the engine starts, charge the discharged battery for
about two hours with the engine running at the full speed.
NOTE
Indicated on the upper part of the battery is the polarity of each terminal.
CAUTION
Always connect the positive (+) terminals first, and do not connect the
negative (-) terminal of the working vehicle directly to the negative (-)
terminal of the discharged battery. If these precautions are not followed,
the battery may explode, causing vehicle damage or severe injuries.
NOTE
If the battery is not charged as usual, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized workshop.
 Vehicle emission standard

A major pollutant discharged from a diesel engine is black smoke. Smoke density over 20% (+ 5% if the vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
charger or intercooler) is subject to legal penalty.

The emission test is not conducted at the driver's disposal, but is conducted by the specified method, snap acceleration 3-mode emission
test. If the emission test is not conducted based on the specified 3-mode emission test, the carbon accumulated within the exhaust pipes may
be measured, causing excessive emission measurement level. Make sure to have a full understanding of the correct emission test method.

※ Snap acceleration 3-mode emission test

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Once the engine reaches a normal temperature, test the emission in the following procedure:
1. Run the engine idle for a while.
2. Before measuring the emission level, perform abrupt acceleration up to the full speed 3 times.
(During this abrupt acceleration, carbon in the exhaust pipe is discharged.)
3. Clean the air in the tester (clean the existing smoke for three to four seconds) and install the filter.
4. Perform the snap acceleration up to the maximum RPM and test the first emission.

※ Emission concentration calculation

The average of all three emission concentration measurement values (rounding off a decimal) is considered as the emission concentration
of the vehicle. At this point, if the difference between the maximum and minimum values measured for three times is over 5%, disregard
the maximum value and test the emission again.

11 - 71
Noise and vibration control components
CAUTION
Modifying or changing the noise control devices attached on the truck or installing non-genuine parts may cause abnormal noise or exceed the allowable
noise level, and therefore, should be avoided.

Noise control components

Engine side upper cover

Engine side lower cover

Engine undercover

Exhaust cover

11 - 72
 Precautions and warnings on self maintenance work

WARNING
· The engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, catalyst and muffler are very hot after the vehicle is driven. When checking the engine compartment, turn off the
engine and have the vehicle cooled off sufficiently before checking.
· When checking the battery, fuel related components and washer fluid, keep inflammables away from the vehicle and do not work on the vehicle where
flames or sparks may occur.
· If the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, do not connect or disconnect the battery. Make sure to connect or disconnect the battery after the ignition
switch is set to the OFF position.
· When connecting the battery cables, take care not to have the positive (+) and negative (-) cables swapped.

11. Inspection and Maintenance

· Be careful of a short circuit as the battery cables and vehicle wiring deliver high current and voltage.
· Stop the engine when working on the vehicle in a closed or poorly ventilated place.
· Keep used oil, coolant or other fluid away from children. (when disposing of these used oil or fluid, contact a specialist)
· When checking the vehicle, make sure to turn off the engine, set the shift lever in the N (automatic transmission ) or neutral (manual transmission) posi-
tion, and apply the parking brake.
· Even if the engine is not running, the cooling fan may be rotating. When checking the vehicle around the cooling fan or radiator, disconnect the negative
(-) terminal of the battery.

CAUTION
· Check various oil, fluid and coolant level frequently. If driving the vehicle with insufficient oil, fluid or coolant, the vehicle can be damaged and the war-
ranty will be void.
· When replacing consumables, make sure to use the genuine ones only.
· When adding oil, fluid or coolant, make sure not to get them on your skin, clothes or painted body surface.
· Adding oil, fluid or coolant over the specified level can damage the system. Always keep the specified level.
· Since it may degrade vehicle performance, make sure not to have water or dirt enter the oil or coolant tank.
· Even if the mileage may be short, the oil or coolant level may become lower after an extended period of time. Check the level regularly and add it if
needed.
· Dispose of used oil, coolant or other fluid and containers according to the specified legal disposal procedure.

11 - 73
Troubleshooting
Engines and related parts
● The start motor is not working or runs too slow
Cause
· Discharged battery
· Cut, loose or corroded battery
terminal
· Cut ground cable
· Excessively high engine oil
viscosity
● The engine does not start although the start motor operates
Cause
· No fuel in fuel tank
· Insufficient preheat operation
· Air in fuel system
· Contaminated air cleaner
element
● The engine stops easily when it is at low RPM
Cause
· Contaminated air cleaner
element
11 - 74
Action
· Charge or replace the battery
· Trim the corroded part with a
file and tighten the terminal
· Connect it firmly
· Replace engine oil with proper
viscosity
Action
· Add fuel
· Preheat again
· Bleed the system
· Clean or replace the element
Action
· Clean or replace the element
● The engine does not produce sufficient power
Cause
· Impossible to release parking
brake
· Contaminated air cleaner
element
· Stiff brake
· Insufficient aqueous urea
● Exhaust gas is black
Cause
· Contaminated air cleaner
● The engine overheats
Cause
· Curtain over radiator
· Low coolant level
· Sludge in radiator core
· Rust or scale in coolant
· Loose or damaged belt
Action
· Operate the parking brake
lever repeatedly
· Clean or replace the element
· Adjust the brake lining clearance
· Add more aqueous urea
Action
· Clean or replace the element
Action
· Remove the curtain
· Add more coolant and check
for any leakage. Also, check
if the radiator cap is securely
tightened
· Clean the radiator core
· Clean the radiator and replace
coolant
· Adjust the belt tension or
replace the belt

● Fuel consumption is excessive
Cause
· Fuel leakage
· Contaminated air cleaner
· Low tire inflation pressure
Action
· Check the fuel system and
retighten any loose parts
· Clean or replace the element
· Adjust the pressure to the
specified value
Chassis and related parts
● The transmission or differential makes abnormal noise
Cause Action
· Insufficient gear oil · Add oil to specified level
● The steering wheel feels heavier
Cause Action
· Low inflation pressure of front · Adjust it to specified pressure

11. Inspection and Maintenance

· Excessive engine cooling
● Engine oil consumption is excessive
Cause
· Improper oil used
· Excessive oil amount
· Oil leakage
· Passed oil change interval
· Engine not warmed up
sufficiently
● The engine oil pressure cannot meet the specified level
Cause
· Insufficient engine oil
· Improper oil viscosity
· Oil leakage
· Install the radiator curtain
tire
· Insufficient power steering oil · Add it to a specified level
Action
· Replace it with the specified oil ● The steering wheel does not return to the center smoothly
· Adjust oil to a specified level
Cause Action
· Check the lubrication system and
tighten any loose parts again · No grease on each part of · Apply grease
steering system
· Replace oil based on the
schedule
· Perform the specified engine ● The steering wheel vibrates
warm-up
Cause Action
· Loose hub nut · Tighten it to the specified
Action torque
· Add it to a specified level · Different left and right tire · Adjust each tire inflation
inflation pressure pressure evenly
· Replace engine oil with proper
viscosity · Uneven tire wear · Replace
· Check the lubrication system and
tighten any loose parts again

11 - 75
 ● The brake performance is poor ● Lamps do not come on
Cause Action Cause Action
· Excessive tire inflation · Adjust it to specified pressure · Defective bulb · Replace
pressure
· Blown fuse · Replace the fuse
· Air leakage from brake system · Check pipe joints
· Poor grounding · Ground correctly
· Excessive brake lining · Adjust it to specified clearance
clearance
● One-sided braking is occurred
Cause Action
· Different left and right tire · Adjust each tire inflation pres-
inflation pressure sure evenly
· Uneven tire wear · Replace
· Adjust lining clearance

● The brake drags

Cause Action
· Incorrect brake lining clearance · Adjust lining clearance

Electric system
● Battery consumption is excessive
Cause Action
· Cut, loose or corroded battery · Trim the corroded part with a
terminal file and tighten the terminal
· Low charging level of battery · Charge the battery
(if the charging indicator is in
black)
· Lamp switch kept ON · Turn off the switch

11 - 76
 Maintenance schedule chart
CAUTION
1. Appropriate maintenance and service of the vehicle is the user's responsibility.
2. To guarantee safe driving and maximum economy, regular inspection should be performed based on the maintenance schedule.
3. This maintenance schedule chart is based on the assumption that the vehicle is driven for 1 month or 4,000 km under a normal condition. If the vehicle
is driven for over 1 month or over 4,000 km or under a severe condition, maintenance interval should be shortened.
4. Under the following driving conditions, more frequent maintenance work is required.
- driving on dusty road
- Driving in full “GVW” load for long distance and at a high speed
- driving at a low speed for long hours

11. Inspection and Maintenance

- Frequently starting and stopping the engine
5. All replacement parts used for the maintenance work should be genuine DAEWOO parts.

11 - 77
 Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
Inspection item 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
1,000 km

● Clutch
Checking clutch pedal free play and function At every 10,000 km

Changing clutch oil At every 20,000 km or two years

Checking and adding clutch oil At every 10,000 km or frequent checking

● Transmission
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid level ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking and adding ZF automatic transmission
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
fluid level

Checking and adding Allison automatic transmission

Frequently
fluid level

Checking manual transmission fluid leakage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking ZF automatic transmission fluid leakage Frequently

Checking Allison automatic transmission fluid leakage Frequently

Changing manual transmission fluid At initial 5,000 km, and then every 40,000 km

Changing ZF manual transmission fluid At every 60,000 km or yearly

Changing ZF automatic transmission fluid At every 60,000 km or yearly

Changing Allison automatic transmission fluid At every 40,000km or yearly

Checking transmission linkage looseness ●
● Propeller shaft
Checking loose joints ● ●
Checking spline wear ●
Checking bearing and related parts wear ●

11 - 78
 Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Inspection item 1,000 km
● Front and rear axles

Checking loose front wheel bearing ● ● ● ●

Checking loose rear wheel bearing ● ●

Checking loose axle shaft clamps and bolts ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking and adding rear axle fluid level ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking rear axle fluid leakage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Changing rear axle fluid At initial 8,000 km, and then every 40,000 km or every year

Checking front axle cracks, damage or twist ● ●

● Suspension

Tightening U-bolt nut ● ● ●

Checking spring damage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking loose parts and damage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking shock absorber leakage and damage ● ● ● ●

● Wheels

Tightening wheel nuts At initial 50 - 100 km, and 1,000 km and then every 4,000 km

Checking wheel disc damage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Steering system

Checking steering wheel play ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Checking loose mounting parts ● ● ● ●

Checking loose or damaged linkage ● ● ● ● ●

11 - 79
 Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
Inspection item 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
1,000 km
Checking front wheel alignment At initial 8,000 km, and then every 40,000 km
Checking gearbox oil leakage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Changing power steering fluid and filter If oil is contaminated or when repairing power steering system
Checking and adding power steering fluid At initial 1,000km, and then every 5,000km
● Main brake
Checking function ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking brake pedal free play ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking brake system air leakage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking lining wear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking brake drum wear and damage ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking hoses and pipe leakage or damage ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replacing air dryer filter cartridge At every 50,000 km or yearly
● Parking spring brake
Checking performance ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● Electric system
Checking battery charging condition ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking start motor performance ● ● ● ●
Checking alternator and regulator performance ● ● ● ●
Checking damage on wiring connections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking lamps ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● Air conditioner
Replacing fresh air filter At every 10,000 km (earlier replacement in case of severe air pollution)
● Others
Checking and tightening bolts and nuts again in
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
each part

11 - 80
DL06K (Doosan) engine
Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
Inspection item 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
1,000 km
Checking and cleaning dry air cleaner Frequently ● ● ● ●
Replacing dry air cleaner element If con-
●
taminated
Checking engine oil level and adding oil Before
driving
At initial 5,000 km, and then every 40,000/60,000 km

11. Inspection and Maintenance

Changing engine oil and filter
(if the daily mileage is within 500 km, change it every 40,000 km)
Replacing primary fuel filter (prefilter) ●
Checking primary fuel filter (prefilter) and draining water At every 10,000 km
Replacing secondary fuel filter ●
· Driving in city area: At every 80,000 km
Replacing blow-by filter · Long distance driving: At every 120,000 km
· Severe condition (premium): At every 20,000 km perform check and change
Checking air compressor performance ●
Checking damage and looseness of exhaust pipes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cleaning inside of fuel tank ● ●
Changing coolant (including anti-freeze) and flushing
●
inside of coolant tank
Draining oil from intercooler Clean or drain at every 100,000 km
Replacing primary and secondary aqueous urea filters At every 180,000 km (at every 1,400 hours or yearly)

11 - 81
F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine
Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
Inspection item 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
1,000 km
Checking and cleaning dry air cleaner Frequently ● ● ● ●
Replacing dry air cleaner element If contami-
●
nated
Checking engine oil level and adding oil Before
driving
Changing engine oil and filter ●
Replacing primary fuel filter (prefilter) At every 80,000 km
Checking primary fuel filter (prefilter) and At every
draining water week
Replacing secondary fuel filter At every 80,000 km
Replacing blow-by filter ●
Checking air compressor performance ●
Checking damage or looseness of exhaust pipes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cleaning inside of fuel tank ● ●
Changing coolant (including anti-freeze) and
●
flushing inside of coolant tank
Draining oil from intercooler Clean or drain at every 100,000 km
Checking auxiliary belts ●
Replacing auxiliary belts At every 240,000km
Replacing primary and secondary aqueous
At every 180,000 km (at every 1,400 hours or yearly)
urea filters

11 - 82
 B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine ( I )
Test drive (mileage x 1,000 km) At Initial
Inspection item 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
1,000 km

Checking and cleaning dry air cleaner Frequently ● ● ● ●

Replacing dry air cleaner element If contami-

At every 60,000km
nated

Replacing primary fuel filter (prefilter) At every 60,000km

Checking primary fuel filter (prefilter) and At every

11. Inspection and Maintenance

draining water week

Checking damage or looseness of exhaust pipes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Cleaning inside of fuel tank ● ●

Draining oil from intercooler Clean or drain at every 60,000km

Replacing auxiliary belts At every 200,000km

11 - 83

11장.indd 83 2015-12-24 오후 5:40:36

B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine ( II )
Maintenance Procedures at Daily Interval
● Engine Lubricating Oil Level - Check
● Engine Coolant Level - Check
● Cooling Fan - Inspect
● Drive Belts - Inspect
● Fuel-Water Separator - Drain
Maintenance Procedures at 10,000 Kilometers(6000 Miles), 250 Hours, or 3 Months
● Lubricating Oil-Change
● Lubricating Oil Filters - Change
● Air Cleaner Restriction - Check
● Air Intake Piping - Check
● Charge - Air Cooler - Inspect
● Air Compressor - Check
● Batteries - Inspect
● Radiator Pressure Cap - Check
Maintenance Procedures at 19,000 Kilometers(12,000 Miles), 500 Hours, or 6 Months
● Fuel Filter(Spin-On Type)-Change
● Antifreeze - Check
● Cooling Fan belt tensioner - Inspect
Maintenance Procedures at 38,000 Kilometers(24,000 Miles), 1000 Hours, or 1 Year
● Overhead Set-Adjust
● Drive Belts - Test
Maintenance Procedures at 77,000 Kilometers(48,000 Miles), 2000 Hours, or 2 Years
● Air Compressor Discharge Lines - Check
● Cooling System - Flush
● Vibration Damper, Rubber - Inspect
● Vibration Damper, Viscous - Inspect

11 - 84
12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance
Chapter 1

Chapter 2
Maintenance of new vehicle....................... 12-2
Chapter 3
Vehicle care.................................................. 12-3
Chapter 4
Vehicle maintenance in cold weather........ 12-7
Chapter 5

Vehicle maintenance in summer................ 12-9 Chapter 6

Vehicle maintenance in winter................. 12-10 Chapter 7

Chapter 8
Engine maintenance in winter.................. 12-13
Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Maintenance of new vehicle
Maintenance of new vehicle Comply with the driving guideline for a new
vehicle.

This truck is designed with scientific researches and design, quality

material and cutting edge technologies. It also went through close The initial 5,000 km of driving is the running-in period for your new
inspection and test to ensure satisfactory performance. vehicle.
However, if you would like your vehicle to perform more smoothly · After starting the engine, warm it up so that it runs at an
and to offer more economic driving, please follow these precautions: optimal level while driving.

Keep the oil and fluid change intervals. NOTE

Three minutes of warming-up is sufficient in winter.
This diesel engine is filled with the recommended oil at factory.
Change engine oil and filter with the specified ones regularly after
driving..

12 - 2

· Never make sudden acceleration while the engine is idling.
· Avoid sudden start, acceleration or braking.
· For the first 5,000 km of driving, reduce the speed by 30% of the
maximum RPM.
· By referring to the “Instruments and Steering System” and “Check
Items before Driving”, check your vehicle before driving.
· To help your vehicle maintain its optimal condition, make sure
that you have a full understanding of information in “Inspection
and Maintenance.”
CAUTION
To improve safe driving and the vehicle's durability, refer to information
in “Specifications and Service Data” and avoid loading over the GVW.
Vehicle care
Car washing
12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance
The best way to prevent deterioration and corrosion of the vehicle
body is washing the vehicle often.
Particularly for vehicles under the following conditions, make sure
to wash it as there is a risk of damage or corrosion on the painted
surface of the vehicle body.
· Driving at seacoast localities with high concentration of salt
· Driving on the road sprayed with calcium chloride in winter
· Driving in the region with heavy smoke or coal tar
· Frequent driving in the industrial area
· Driving in dusty or muddy area
·If the vehicle body is stained with sap from wood or bird excrement
·Chemical agents sprayed on the vehicle body
WARNING
Damage on the painted surface may cause corrosion. Therefore, apply
repair paint on any damaged surface.
12 - 3
 Transmission breather
Air inlet

Intake
air duct

Wash the vehicle in the shade. If the vehicle was exposed to direct
sunlight for long hours, make sure to cool it down sufficiently before
washing.
Wash the vehicle in the following order:
① Remove any mud, dust, sand or other foreign materials on the
vehicle body with water.
② Mix water and detergent in a container and wipe the vehicle
in the direction from top to bottom with soft cloth or sponge.
③ Remove water with soft cloth.
CAUTION
· Be careful not to pour water on electrical systems, electric devices,
connectors or air hoses.
· If water is left in the door key hole or rubber parts, it may be frozen in
a cold climate region. To prevent this, remove water around the door
thoroughly after washing.
· Do not clean plastic or resin parts with a thinner or gasoline.
· When using water with hoses, make sure not to have water get into
the air inlet of the intake duct.
· Make sure to wash your vehicle after having driven in seacoast localities
or on a road sprayed with anti-freeze agents.
· If spraying water directly onto the transmission breather during washing the
vehicle, water may enter the transmission through the breather air passage,
resulting in transmission damage. Never spray water onto the breather.

12 - 4
● Cleaning bumper
Remove foreign materials using a sponge or chamois leather.
If the bumper is stained with engine oil or other fluid, wipe it out
with appropriate cleaner.
CAUTION
Do not apply wax with high abrasive level onto the bumper. The painted
surface can be damaged. Always use good quality waxes for vehicles.
● Cleaning aluminum
Remove foreign materials on the aluminum surface with water
and soap or detergent.
CAUTION
Contact of some corrosive materials on aluminum wheels may damage
the wheel surface. Therefore, the wheels should be cleaned regularly.
● Cleaning underbody
Wash the underbody after it has been driven in seacoast localities
with high concentration of salt or on a road sprayed with calcium
chloride in winter.
CAUTION
The vehicle underbody is designed to be resistant to salt. However, if it is
exposed to salt repeatedly, it can be corroded. Make sure to wash it regularly.
● Washing vehicle
Wash the vehicle if it has been driven on a road sprayed with
chemical agents against the foot-and-mouth disease.
CAUTION
The chemical agents against the foot-and-mouth disease are corrosive
materials and should be washed out immediately if the vehicle made
contact with such agents.
● Cleaning lamps
If using oil remover to clean the lens surface of lamps with plas-
tic transparent lenses, such as the headlamps, fog lamps and
tail lamps, the material property of the lenses can be changed,
leading to lens damage. Use only water and soap or detergent
to clean such lenses.
CAUTION
When cleaning lamps in summer, avoid using PB chemicals.
● Repairing damaged painted surface
12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance
Apply touch-up paint to the damaged surface.
Vehicle polishing
Before polishing the vehicle body, wash the vehicle, remove water
thoroughly and perform the polishing in the shade.
Put a small amount of wax on soft cloth to apply it evenly to the
vehicle body, and rub the waxed body surface with clean and soft
cloth for polishing.
Rub the surface until no wax is left on the body.
NOTE
Depending on the type of waxes, the polishing method may differ.
CAUTION
Avoid contact of polish wax for soft vehicle body to plastic, synthetic resins
or rubber as it may cause discoloring or bleaching.
WARNING
If inappropriate wax is used on the body, it can damage the painted
surface or leave stains on the surface. Also, it can occur skin irritation.
12 - 5
Integral component maintenance
When cleaning synthetic resins, including plastics, use a suitable CAUTION
cleaner or lukewarm water and soap. Then, wipe them with clean
Check the seat belts regularly and replace the damaged seat belts or
wet rage without soap and finally use dry cloth to remove any
related parts immediately.
moisture completely.

CAUTION Cleaning glass

If cleaning synthetic resins, including plastics, with improper cleaners,
they can be discolored or decolored. Never use an improper cleaner.
CAUTION
Inappropriate cleaners may include acetone, carbon tetrachloride for
lacquer, enamel, reduction agent or bleaching agent.
First, remove dust or sand on the glass surface with water, and using
glass cleaning solution and soft cloth, clean the inside and outside
of the glass.
CAUTION
Rubbing the glass with dry cloth without removing dust or sand on the
surface in advance may cause scratches on the surface.

Remove dust on the carpet or seat with a vacuum cleaner.

If the carpet is severely contaminated, spray detergent and wipe it WARNING
out with dry cloth. Cleaning glass with oily cloth or wax will cause it to produce abnormal
sounds or vibration when wipers are working. When raining, the windshield
Cleaning seat belts may not get cleaned easily, causing accidents due to the poor driving sight.
When cleaning contaminated seat belts, use lukewarm water and
soap. Then, wipe them with clean wet rage without soap and finally
use dry cloth to remove any moisture completely.
Make sure to keep seat belts always clean and dry.

WARNING
If seat belts are contaminated with polishing agents, oil, chemicals or
dye, the structure of the seat belts may be deteriorated, reducing the
protection effect of the seat belts in case of an accident.

12 - 6
 Vehicle maintenance in cold weather
Vehicle maintenance in cold weather
Road conditions in winter are often unfavorable to drivers. To cope
with such conditions properly, carry sandbags, chains and a shovel
in the vehicle.
Coolant maintenance
Before the temperature goes down, make sure to check the coolant
concentration.
Coolant concentration inspection needs additional equipments.
Washer fluid maintenance
If you have usually been using water instead of washer fluid, replace
it with a genuine DAEWOO washer before temperature goes down.
CAUTION
Continuous use of non-genuine products or water may cause the washer
fluid to freeze, damaging washer fluid-related parts and obstructing safe
driving.
Tire maintenance

12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance

Therefore, have it checked by an authorized workshop.
To prevent skidding on snowy or icy roads in winter, install snow
CAUTION
tires in advance or prepare chains.
If you have been adding only water to the coolant, the anti-freeze con-
centration may be too low. When the temperature drops below zero under NOTE
this condition, the coolant may freeze, causing severe damage on the
engine and cooling system. Install snow tires in all four wheels and install chains only on the driving
wheels.
This vehicle is filled with all season anti-freeze at factory. Change
anti-freeze at every 40,000 km. CAUTION
If snow tires are installed, slow down the speed by half of the normal
NOTE driving speed. If chains are installed, drive at 50 km/h or lower.

When adding coolant, mix water and anti-freeze in 50:50 ratio.

A/C maintenance
To protect the A/C regardless of seasons, run the A/C for 5 to 10
CAUTION minutes every week.
Use only a genuine DAEWOO anti-freeze.
CAUTION
If the A/C is not used for a long time, A/C gas may leak or the A/C com-
pressor may be damaged due to insufficient lubrication inside the A/C.

12 - 7
Battery maintenance
If the temperature is low, the battery performance will be degraded,
causing poor startability.
On an extremely cold day, it is recommended to keep the battery
warm with old clothing after parking.
Cold start
In winter, resistance in the driving system of the engine and transmis-
sion increases and the battery performance decreases. As a result, it
may be hard to start the engine. Take time to start the engine again.
After the engine is started, do not start off immediately. Instead,
warm up the engine for several minutes to ensure smooth opera-
tion of the engine.
Driving in winter
When driving on a snowy or icy road, maintain a safety distance
twice longer than normal.
When stopping the vehicle, use the engine brake to reduce the
speed and apply the brake.
WARNING
Overspeed, sudden braking or turning the steering wheel suddenly on a
snowy or icy road may cause you to lose control of the vehicle, resulting
in accidents.
After driving through a snowy area, depress the brake pedal several
times at a low speed to dry the brake.
12 - 8
Parking in winter
● Parking brake
If the parking brake is applied when parking, the parking brake
system may become frozen in winter, making it difficult to start
the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the parking brake is frozen, do not force to start the vehicle, but request
authorized emergency services. Make sure to start the vehicle after the
parking brake thawed.
WARNING
If you park the vehicle on a slope, make sure to put the blocks on the
wheels in order to secure the vehicle. Without putting chock blocks, vehicle
may move suddenly, causing accidents.
● Outdoor parking
If possible, face the vehicle to the east, and pull up the wipers
to prevent them from freezing onto the windshield.
CAUTION
Operating the wipers frozen onto the windshield by force may cause
overload on the wiper motor and damage it.
After parking the vehicle, cover the windshield with paper or
cover so that snow is not frozen onto the windshield.
When parking outside, use a vehicle cover if possible.
 Vehicle maintenance in summer
Cooling system Tire inflation pressure
If the cooling system contains slime or rust, the engine can be
overheated. Clean the cooling system thoroughly according to the
instruction before and after using anti-freeze.

CAUTION
Drain the coolant by opening the drain cock on the radiator, add soft water,
and after about 30 minutes, start the engine and drain water. Repeat this
procedure until clean water comes out of the radiator.

12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance

Engine oil and gear oil
Use the specified oil.

The tire inflation pressure should be checked more often than in

the other seasons.

12 - 9
Vehicle maintenance in winter
Use of anti-freeze Cautions for anti-freeze

A certain amount of anti-freeze should be used depending on the

season to prevent freezing and corrosion of the engine in cold CAUTION
weather. 1. Clean the engine before adding anti-freeze.
Using non-genuine anti-freeze may cause corrosion on vehicle 2. As anti-freeze is penetrative, causing leakage easily, any damaged
components. Use only the genuine anti-freeze. rubber hose should be replaced.
3. S
 ince anti-freeze melts paint coating, make sure not to spill it on the
CAUTION vehicle surface.
Keep the mixture ratio of anti-freeze and water to 50:50 in all seasons.

12 - 10
Changing engine oil Using diesel fuel in winter

SAE40 SAE15W40

12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance

If the temperature decreases in winter, the engine oil may become - Paraffin included in fuel (diesel) coagulates below zero tem-
hardened, making engine start difficult in the morning. peratures, causing malfunction of the fuel delivery system.
- To prevent this, use diesel fuel for winter in winter.
Handling battery
In an extremely cold weather, keep the battery fully charged. WARNING
· Excessive filling of white kerosene (petroleum) increases smoke and
engine noise.
· Difference between the ambient temperature and the temperature in the
fuel tank can cause condensation in the fuel tank in winter. If condensed
water enters the engine, it can damage the engine and fuel system.
Drain water from the fuel tank and fuel filter twice or more per month.

12 - 11
 CAUTION
When driving in an extremely cold regions in winter (North Gyeonggi
province, mountain regions in Gangwon province), fill winter diesel fuel
from a local gas station.
Use of diesel in an extremely cold weather
If the temperature drops excessively (below -17°C), paraffin in fuel
is solidified, disabling engine starting. In this case, mix fuel with 10%
of white kerosene (petroleum).
Driving on snowy and icy road
For safety driving on a snowy and icy road in winter, use snow tires
or chains.
If using snow tires, install them in each wheel and prepare a snow
tire as a spare.
If using chains, install them on the rear wheels (driving wheels).

CAUTION
Using fuel mixed with white kerosene (petroleum) on common rail engine
vehicles is prohibited.

CAUTION
If snow tires are mounted, slow down the speed by half of the normal
driving speed. If chains are installed, drive at or below 50 km/h.

WARNING
Even if using snow tires or chains, driving on a snowy or icy road at a
high speed can result in an accident.

12 - 12
 Engine maintenance in winter
DL06K (Doosan) engine
(1) It is recommended to replace the fuel filter element with a new one in an extremely cold weather.
This is because the more contaminated materials filtered out on the outer surface of the filter paper, the more likely it may be blocked
by the wax ingredients produced from the fuel.
(2) Stagnant water on the bottom of the pre-filter (primary fuel filter) may cause the fuel filter to freeze, making engine start difficult in
winter or the engine stop while driving. Make sure to drain water for more than twice per month. (normally, at every 10,000 km)
(3) In winter, always use winter diesel fuel. Use of artificially manufactured alternative fuel or additives other than diesel fuel is absolutely
prohibited.
Additives sold on the market for enhancement of fuel efficiency or power have never been proven to be safe for the common rail fuel

12. Proper Vehicle Maintenance

system engine.
Particularly, alcohol substances included in these additives have been shown to disable the oil-water separation function of the pre-
filter, but other substances have not been confirmed for their harmfulness.
(4) It is recommended to let the engine idle for at least three to five minutes after starting the engine.
If depressing the accelerator pedal abruptly right after the engine is started to boost engine acceleration, resistance in the piping can
be increased by moisture and wax generated from fuel. As a result, necessary fuel cannot be delivered, leading to insufficient fuel and
consequently engine stopping.
As engine idling operation needs the least amount of fuel, this state is the best to start the engine with high resistance in the piping.
Sudden acceleration while the engine is cold increases engine wear, resulting in reducing the service life of the engine.
(5) A preheating device is installed on the pre-filter and is activated automatically based on the fuel temperature. Also it can be activated
manually. Use the preheating device by operating the preheat switch (side mirror defogger).
When pressing this switch, the defogger is automatically activated for 15 minutes and the switch is automatically reset to OFF, not locked.
As operating this switch activates not only the mirror defogger but also the fuel filter heated wire, it can be used to melt fuel in winter.

CAUTION
Activating the defogger several times without starting the engine may discharge the battery. Make sure to use this function after starting the engine.

CAUTION
For the improvement of cold start in winter, the fuel recirculation device is installed. Therefore, if starting the engine after the vehicle has been
stored for an extended period of time, the engine may vibrate for approx. 2 to 3 seconds, but this is normal.

12 - 13
F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine
(1) It is recommended to replace the fuel filter element with a new one in an extremely cold weather.
This is because the more contaminated materials filtered out on the outer surface of the filter paper, the more likely it may be blocked
by the wax ingredients produced from the fuel.
(2) Stagnant water on the bottom of the pre-filter (primary fuel filter) may cause the fuel filter to freeze, make the engine start difficult
in winter or the engine stop while driving. Make sure to drain water for more than twice per month.
(3) In winter, always use winter diesel fuel. Using artificially manufactured alternative fuel or additives other than diesel fuel is absolutely
prohibited.
Particularly, alcohol substances included in these additives have been shown to disable the oil-water separation function of the
pre-filter, but other substances have not been confirmed for their harmfulness.
(4) It is recommended to let the engine idle for at least three to five minutes after starting the engine.
If depressing the accelerator pedal abruptly right after the engine is started to boost engine acceleration, resistance in the piping
can be increased by moisture and wax generated from fuel. As a result, necessary fuel cannot be delivered, leading to insufficient
fuel and consequently engine stopping.
As engine idling operation needs the least amount of fuel, this state is the best to start the engine with high resistance in the piping.
Sudden acceleration while the engine is cold increases engine wear, resulting in reducing the service life of the engine.
(5) A preheating device is installed on the pre-filter and main filter, and is activated automatically based on the fuel temperature. Also
it can be activated manually. Use the preheating device by operating the preheat switch (side mirror defogger).
When pressing this switch, the defogger is automatically activated for 15 minutes and the switch is automatically reset to OFF, not locked.
As operating this switch activates not only the mirror defogger but also the fuel filter heated wire, it can be used to melt fuel in winter.

CAUTION
Activating the defogger several times without starting the engine may discharge the battery. Make sure to use this function after starting the engine.

CAUTION
For the improvement of cold start in winter, the fuel recirculation device is installed. Therefore, if starting the engine after the vehicle has been
stored for an extended period of time, the engine may vibrate for approx. 2 to 3 seconds, but this is normal.

12 - 14
MEMO

12 - 15
MEMO

12 - 16
13. Handing Vehicle Systems
Chapter 1

Turbocharger............................................... 13-2 Chapter 2

Electric devices for customers.................. 13-7 Chapter 3

Precautions for installing PTO drive Chapter 4

shaft and connecting power........................... 13-8
Chapter 5
Emission control system............................ 13-9
Chapter 6
Power restriction by emission
Chapter 7
control system........................................... 13-11
Chapter 8
Hill holder *................................................ 13-15
Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
Turbocharger
Operating principle
As exhaust gas is discharged from the engine after combustion,
its high pressure and heat energy rotate the turbine blades on the
exhaust gas outlet at a high speed. Since the compressor blades
are connected to the turbine shaft in one unit, the compressor
blades rotate at the same speed, supplying a large amount of
fresh air into the engine cylinders.
As a sufficient amount of air is delivered, complete combustion is
possible, achieving fuel saving and power enhancement.
Vehicle driving tips
As the turbocharger rotates at a high speed, insufficient or
delayed engine oil supply can result in damage of bearings and
other parts.
Make sure to follow the driving instructions and maintenance tips
before and after driving.
(1) Engine starting
Check if the oil warning lamp comes on and then goes off when
the engine is started. Also, check that the engine oil pressure
is normal with the engine idling.
After starting the engine, idle the engine (at 600 - 650 rpm) for
approx. one minute. Then, rev up the engine up to 900 - 1,000
rpm for three to four minutes and start off.

CAUTION
Compressor
Engine If the engine is left for an extended period of time (over one week) in
Cylinder Exhaust winter after changing oil and oil filter, make sure to follow the instruc-
Gas tion in “(1) Engine starting” as oil viscosity increases in cold weather.
Outlet (However, the ignition key should not be in the START position for more
than 10 seconds. After 10 seconds, wait for approx. 30 seconds and try
Suction air starting the engine again.
inlet Turbine

13 - 2
 13. Handing Vehicle Systems
While idling the engine for initial one minute at a low speed, hy-
draulic pressure is built in the engine lubrication system. Then,
when increasing the engine idling speed for the next 3 to 4 minutes,
engine oil from the oil pump is delivered to each part, even up to the
turbocharger, which is located higher than most engine components.
(2) For long hour stopping
If idling the engine at 600 - 650 rpm for long hours, a sufficient
amount of oil cannot be delivered to the turbocharger. As a
result, rotating parts can be prematurely worn due to insufficient
lubrication. If it is absolutely necessary to keep the vehicle
stationary with the engine running for a long stretch of time
(over 30 minutes), set the engine idling speed to 900 - 1,000
rpm so that the turbocharger can be supplied with sufficient oil.

If driving the vehicle and accelerating the engine while the turbo-
charger is not supplied with enough engine oil, heat generated by
the turbocharger, which is running at a high speed (over 100,000
rpm), cannot be removed so the bearing and shaft rotating parts
can be seized.

13 - 3
 After 2 - 3 min.
of idling

LOCK
ON

(3) After driving
Do not stop the engine immediately after driving. If stopping the
engine suddenly after full load driving, the turbocharger keeps
rotating by its rotational inertia. Then, heat generated from the
hot turbocharger burns engine oil on its rotating parts completely
so the rotating parts can be damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
Also, rapid cooling generates heat stress which causes degradation
of other engine components and coolant consumption. Therefore,
after driving, idle the engine for three to four minutes so that the
turbocharger is cooled down slowly and engine oil on its parts is
not burned out.

13 - 4
Maintenance tips

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

As the turbocharger rotates at a very high speed (over 100,000
rpm), it is very sensitive to foreign materials in the air, engine oil
contamination and engine oil amount. Its condition should be main-
tained with special care.
(1) Air cleaner maintenance
If foreign materials enter the turbocharger, they can cause
premature wear and damage on the compressor blades and
driving parts of the turbocharger. Therefore, clean and replace
the air cleaner element frequently. Also, check the connecting
hose between the air cleaner and turbocharger for abnormal
condition frequently.
(2) Engine oil maintenance
Contaminated engine oil can cause wear and damage on the
bearing, rotating shaft and bearing housing inner surface, re-
sulting in severe deterioration of the turbocharger and engine
performance. This leads to reduced engine power, excessive
emissions and increased noise.
CAUTION
Make sure to use the specified oil and oil filter and keep their change
intervals.

13 - 5
Troubleshooting table
Symptom Insufficient Black Excessive Abnormal Repetitive high and Oil leakage from Oil leakage from
Blue
engine smoke engine oil noise from low pitched noise from compressor turbine sealing
smoke
Reason power consumption turbocharger turbocharger sealing section section

Clogged air cleaner element ○ ○ ○ ○

Restriction in air suction passage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○
Restriction in air outlet passage between
compressor housing and intake manifold
Restriction in intake manifold ○ ○ ○

○
Air leakage from passage between air
cleaner and compressor housing

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Air leakage from passage between com-
pressor housing and intake manifold

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Air leakage from passage between intake
manifold and engine cylinder
Restriction in intake manifold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Restriction in muffler or exhaust pipe ○ ○ ○
Gas leakage from exhaust manifold ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○
Gas leakage from turbine inlet of exhaust
manifold joint

○
Gas leakage from turbine housing outlet
passage
Restriction in turbocharger oil discharge pipe ○ ○ ○ ○
Clogged engine crankcase ventilation passage ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○
Foreign material in turbocharger bearing
housing
Incorrect fuel injection amount ○ ○
Incorrect injection timing or valve clearance ○ ○
Excessively worn engine piston ring or liner ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Problem in engine (valve, piston, etc.) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Foreign material on compressor blade ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Damaged turbocharger ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

13 - 6
 Electric devices for customers
Mounting wiring
There are separate power lines inside and outside the cab so that customers can install and use various equipments, such as a automatic
dump cover and radio.
(1) Fuse: AF2 (max. 30 A), AF5 (max. 15 A)
(2) There are switches in the cabin and under the right frame on the back of the cabin so that electric devices can be connected to them.
CAUTION
When installing an additional device, use the fuse with allowable line capacity.

Consumer connector position on driver side (dashboard on driver side)

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

Consumer connector position on frame (frame on passenger side)

※ The consumer connector position on the frame can be different by vehicle models.

13 - 7
Precautions for installing PTO drive shaft and connecting power
When installing the PTO drive shaft, keep the followings:
CAUTION
1. When installing the PTO drive shaft, use only genuine PTO.
2. Refer to the drawing for the specification and mounting dimensions of the
PTO before installation.
3. If it is necessary to us a PTO other than the genuine one, contact your
dealer. However, if the vehicle is equipped with the ZF automatic transmis-
sion (ASTRONIC), only genuine PTO should be used.
4. Follow the specified mounting angle.
5. The intersection angle of the PTO drive shaft should be 7° or below. Also, set
the intersection angle of the yokes at both ends of the PTO drive shaft identical.
6. Approx. ±10 mm of displacement is occurred in the horizontal and vertical
directions at the outlet of the PTO during driving. Therefore, be cautious
with the allowable intersection angle of the PTO drive shaft.
7. If these instructions are not followed, the PTO drive shaft's rotational vibra-
tion can damage the transmission and PTO severely.
13 - 8
CAUTION
※ Precautions for ZF automatic transmission (AS-Lite)
After installing the PTO, contact your dealer to adjust the “transmission
TCU program.”
WARNING
Damage occurred due to negligence of the above instructions will void
the warranty and cause expensive repair.
Cautions for PTO operation
(1) When the clutch is disengaged, the clutch dependent PTO should
operate or stop.
(2) Decoupling should be performed while the engine is idling.
(3) The PTO should be engaged only after the countershaft is com-
pletely stopped. If engaging the PTO while the countershaft is
moving, a rattling sound will be heard.
(4) Operating and stopping PTO
① If the PTO operation is not allowed, a rattling noise is heard.
If necessary, take more waiting time before operation or
check the operating characteristics for clutch engagement.
It is necessary to engage the clutch slowly and increase the
PTO operating speed.
② If the engine vibrates or abnormal noise is generated during
PTO operation, contact your dealer.
 Emission control system
SCR (Selective Catalyst Reduction) system

Aqueous urea inlet

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

(1) SCR (Selective Catalyst Reduction) system
The SCR (Selective Catalyst Reduction) system is a device
that sprays aqueous urea into exhaust gas to bring reaction of
nitrogen oxide (NOx) in exhaust gas with catalyst in order to
convert it to harmless nitrogen (N2) and steam (H2O).
NOTE
Nitrogen oxide (NOx) refers to a compound of oxygen and nitrogen
resulted from oxidation of nitrogen in the air or fuel during combustion.
Nitrogen oxide (NOx) is a primary cause of smog and acid rain. It forms
a ozone layer in the atmosphere and destroys the ozone layer in the
stratosphere, affecting living things directly. It is also known to acceler-
ate global warming.
(2) Aqueous urea
This solution is used to remove nitrogen oxide (NOx) in exhaust
gas. It needs to be charged frequently as its consumption
amount is approx. 5% of fuel consumption (for example, 5 ℓ of
urea consumed for 100 ℓ of fuel).
NOTE
When starting the engine initially in cold weather, discharged exhaust gas
may contain vapor. However, this is normal as this symptom is occurred
by pre-inspection of aqueous urea injection function.
CAUTION
If driving the vehicle without aqueous urea, nitrogen oxide (NOx) can be
produced and urea dosing system can be damaged. If all aqueous urea
is used up, add more before driving.

13 - 9
 CAUTION
Quality of aqueous urea has a major role in the service life of the SCR
(Selective Catalyst Reduction) system and proper operation of related
parts. Make sure to use genuine products only.
(3) Primary and secondary aqueous urea filters
The primary and secondary aqueous urea filters are integrated
in the urea control unit (DCU).
· Under the normal driving condition, replace the urea filters
at every 180,000 km (at every 1,400 hours or one year).

CAUTION
If made contact to the skin, aqueous urea will irritate it, causing skin
diseases. If the skin (or hair) is contaminated by aqueous urea, take off
all the clothing contaminated and wash the skin with water.
WARNING
Damage occurred due to negligence of the above instructions will void
the warranty and cause expensive repair.

CAUTION
Use only the genuine aqueous urea in the aqueous urea tank. Adding
diesel or other additives may cause the exhaust system to malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not fill the fuel tank with aqueous urea. It will damage the fuel system.

13 - 10
 Power restriction by emission control system
(1) Power restriction procedure for engine equipped with SCR
1) Corresponding error code generated → OBD warning lamp ON/blinking & Check Engine warning lamp(CEL) ON → Power restric-
tion condition met → Power restricted
2) If the urea tank is empty, power is restricted to protect the system regardless of NOx sensor installation for both DL06K (Doosan)
engine and F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine.
· Condition for power restriction
- DL06K (Doosan) engine: 0 km/h
- F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine: driving speed below 5 km/h and idling speed below 1,000 rpm
(2) Vehicle equipped with DL06K (Doosan) engine (SCR)
OBD warning Check Engine
Power
Items Description lamp warning lamp (CEL) Driver action

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

restriction
ON/blinking illumination

○
Add more aqueous
A Empty urea tank x
urea

○
Poor quality aqueous urea used, or parts, including injectors,
B x
modified for lower aqueous urea consumption

C SCR removed without approval x ○

Power is restricted in
50 hours, so make
○
Mechanical malfunction of emission control system, including
D x sure to have your ve-
defective aqueous urea injector of SCR
hicle checked by your
○
NOx sensor (if equipped) or aqueous urea level sensor faulty, workshop immediately.
E x
removed or modified without approval

F Malfunction of other SCR functions x ○

CAUTION
Use genuine aqueous urea only. Adding diesel or other additives may cause the exhaust system to malfunction.

NOTE
'X': The Check Engine warning lamp (CEL) does not come on.
'O': Power will be restricted immediately or in 50 hours if the power restriction condition is satisfied.

13 - 11
 (3) Vehicle with F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine (SCR)
OBD warning Check Engine
Power
Items Description lamp warning lamp (CEL) Driver action
restriction
ON/blinking illumination

○ ○
Add more aqueous
A Empty urea tank
urea

○ ○
Poor quality aqueous urea used, or parts, including injectors,
B
modified for lower aqueous urea consumption

C SCR removed without approval ○ ○

Power is restricted in
36 hours, so make sure
○ ○
Mechanical malfunction of emission control system, including
D to have your vehicle
defective aqueous urea injector of SCR
checked by your work-
shop immediately.
○
NOx sensor (if equipped) or aqueous urea level sensor faulty,
E x
removed or modified without approval

F Malfunction of other SCR functions ○ ○

CAUTION
Use genuine aqueous urea only. Adding diesel or other additives may cause the exhaust system to malfunction.

NOTE
'X': The Check Engine warning lamp (CEL) does not come on.
'O': Power will be restricted immediately or in 36 hours if the power restriction condition is satisfied.
※ The Check Engine warning lamp (CEL) comes on while the engine power is restricted.

13 - 12
(4) Power restriction release procedure
1) DL06K (Doosan) engine
· Action taken for corresponding error code → ECU normal (error erased) → Normal
· For dosing valve error, action taken for corresponding error code → ECU normal (error erased) → Ignition switch “OFF” → Ignition
switch “ON” → Normal

2) F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine

· Action taken for corresponding error code → ECU normal (error erased) → Ignition switch “OFF” for 10 sec. or longer → Cycling
ignition switch “ON/OFF” 3 times → Normal

(5) Actions for illumination and blinking of urea related warning lamp (indicator)

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

Check the urea level and add some before the tank becomes empty.
1. Urea level indicator on instrument cluster (monochrome-LCD display)

Urea level indicator

Urea level

13 - 13
 2. Actions for illumination and blinking of urea related warning lamp (indicator)

Urea related Action by engines

warning lamp and indicator DL06K (Doosan) engine F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine

· The urea level is over 20% (normal).

Urea (%) Urea symbol
(White) → Add more urea as necessary.

· Urea level below 20%: blinking (warning)

Urea (%) Urea symbol
(White) → Add more urea.

· This comes on or blinks when the urea level is · This comes on or blinks when the vehicle is
below 7%. driven for 5 minutes or longer with the urea
· If keeping driving without adding urea while level below 3%.
the lamp is blinking, engine power will be · In this case, the lamp blinks and the engine
restricted. power is restricted.
· This lamp can also come on when other SCR · This lamp can also come on when other SCR
components malfunction. components malfunction.

· After urea is added to the tank and vehicle is started normally, the lamp is automatically turned off
OBD warning lamp and the engine power is restored.
※ When this warning lamp is illuminated due to low urea level, adding urea to the tank performing
(Amber)
the above procedure will turn off the lamp. However, if the warning lamp is illuminated due to other
causes, have your system checked and repaired by your workshop.

· This indicator show the urea level in the urea tank in percent (%).
· The urea level gauge is displayed when pressing the ENTER button on the right side of the
Urea level gauge steering wheel once.

13 - 14
 Hill holder *
Hill holder
Hill holder function: When the driver stops uphill or downhill and moves the vehicle again, the hill holder function helps prevent the vehicle
from being rolled back as the braking system holds the vehicle temporarily with the braking pressure.

13. Handing Vehicle Systems

Normal braking pressure Vehicle started without rolling back when
applied as usual during braking depressing accelerator pedal
How to operate
· To activate the hill holder function on a slope, check the following conditions first:
① Confirm that the parking brake is released.
② Check that the pressure in the air tank is over 6.5 bar.
· After confirming the above conditions,
① Press the hill holder button ( ).
② Depress the brake pedal.
· While depressing the brake pedal, confirm that the hill holder indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster comes on.

How to operate
① Once the brake pedal is released and the accelerator pedal is depressed, the hill holder function is canceled (that means, the
braking pressure is released) so that the vehicle can start.
② Then, the hill holder indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster goes off.
③ When depressing the brake pedal during driving, the hill holder function is activated again.

13 - 15
Warnings
· If only the brake pedal is released, braking pressure is automatically released a little later. Then, the driver is warned of this condition
as follows:
① The warning buzzer sounds in one second after releasing the brake pedal.
② At the same time, the indicator ( ) blinks.
③ Braking pressure is released in one second again.

WARNING
If the driver still does not depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal again even with these warnings, braking pressure is automatically released,
so the vehicle can roll down on a slope, resulting in a dangerous situation. The driver should be prepared for this.

WARNING
· The hill holder function is a supplementary function to help smooth start on a slope. Therefore, if you don't want to use the hill holder function, set
its switch OFF.
· The hill holder function is not the parking brake. Never use it instead of the parking brake. If using the hill holder function instead of the parking
brake to park on a slope, it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

· The operating condition of the hill holder function can be identified with the indicator ( ) when depressing the brake pedal.
· The hill holder function works only on a vehicle that has no defect and all systems work normally.

13 - 16
14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications
Chapter 1
VIN/engine type/self-certification label Chapter 2
locations........................................................ 14-2
Chapter 3
Vehicle specification table.......................... 14-4
Chapter 4

Transmission specification table............... 14-5 Chapter 5

Engine specification table.......................... 14-6 Chapter 6

Chapter 7
PTO overview............................................... 14-8
Chapter 8
Recommended lubricant............................ 14-9
Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14
VIN/engine type/self-certification label locations
NOTE
When repairing the vehicle or purchasing parts, have your vehicle's VIN and engine model information ready before contacting your dealer.

VIN Engine model Self-certification label

VIN

It is engraved on the face of the right It is engraved in different locations by The self-certification label sticker is
frame. engine models. attached on the lower section of the B-pillar
(can access it by opening the driver's door).

14 - 2
DL06K (Doosan) engine F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine

Engine model
Engine model

14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

The DL06K (Doosan) engine has this information stamped on the The F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine has this information stamped on
face of the left upper section of the cylinder block. the back of the right lower section of the cylinder head.

B5.9 (Cummins) engine

For the B5.9 engine, it is marked on the front gear cover.

14 - 3
Vehicle specification table
Model 5Ton Short-only cab chassis, 5TON LONG, E3 5Ton Ultra Long Plus With Pusher 5Ton Ultra Long Plus,
Item E3(215ps) (215ps) Axle, E3(215ps) E3(215ps)
Model code KC2C1 KC3C1 KC6C1 KC6C1
Curb weight(kg) 5,520 5,670 6,830 6,210
Permissible G.V.W(kg) 15,000 15,000 24,000 15,000
Length - 5,700 7,500 ←
Deck
Width - 2,350 ← ←
(mm)
Height - 400 ← ←
Over- Length 7,065 8,200(8,080) 9,950(9,880) ←
all Width 2,280 2,490(2,280) ← ←
(mm) Height 2,840 2,850(2,825) 2,865(2,840) ←
Wheel base(mm) 3,800 4,500 5,800 ←
Tread Front 1,890 ← ← ←
(mm) Rear 1,760 ← ← ←
Max.speed(km/h) 121 ← ← ←
Engine model B5.9 ← ← ←
Air cleaner type Dry ← ← ←
Model T8S6 ← ← ←
CRAWLER - - - -
1st 6.571 ← ← ←
2nd 3.807 ← ← ←
3rd 2.201 ← ← ←
Forward 4th 1.463 ← ← ←
(Hi/Lo) 5th 1.000 ← ← ←
T/M
6th 0.752 ← ← ←
7th - - - -
8th - - - -
9th - - - -
Reverse 1st/2nd 6.240 ← ← ←
Capacity W/O PTO 12.5 ← ← ←
(L) PTO 13.5 ← ← ←
Model T8H/FAW-S390H ← ← ←
Rear
Ratio 4.333 ← ← ←
axle
Capacity(L) 10/8.5 ← ← ←
Tire size 265/70R19.5-14PR ← ← ←

14 - 4
 Transmission specification table

Model T8S6 T110S6 ZF6S1000TO ZF9S1110TO ZF6AS1000TO ALLISON2500

CRAWLER - - - 9.48 - -

1st 6.571 6.628 6.75 6.58 6.75 3.51

2nd 3.807 3.542 3.60 4.68 3.60 1.90

3rd 2.201 2.137 2.13 3.48 2.13 1.44

Forward driving

14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

Transmission

4th 1.463 1.415 1.39 2.62 1.39 1.00

Shift ratio

5th 1.000 1.000 1.00 1.89 1.00 0.74

6th 0.752 0.768 0.78 1.35 0.78 0.643

7th - - - 1.00 - -

8th - - - 0.75 - -

9th - - - - - -

Reverse 6.240 5.779 6.06 8.97 6.06 5.09

14 - 5
Engine specification table

Model B5.9 (Cummins)engine

4 cycle in-line, water-cooled type
Type
Turbo charged & Intercooled
Cylinder I.D. X Stroke -
102x120mm-6
Number of cylinders
Total displacement (cc) 5,900

Compression ratio 17.5:1

Max. power (ps/rpm) 215/2,500

Max. torque(kg.m/RPM) 82/1,500

Injection timing BTDC 8.5°~ABCD 21°

Ignition order 1-5-3-6-2-4

Oil pump type Gear

Oil cooler type Water cooled

Filter type Felt-paper type

Thermostat Wax pellet

·Max. (14.2ℓ)
Oil capacity
·Min. (12.3ℓ)
Coolant capacity 31ℓ

Start motor voltage capacity 24V-4.5kW

Alternator voltage capacity 24V-80A

Air compressor capacity 230 cc/rev.

14 - 6
 Model DL06K (Doosan) engine F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine

Type In-line vertical 4-stroke engine ←

Cylinder I.D. X Stroke -
100 mm x 125-6 102 mm X 120-6
Number of cylinders
Total displacement (cc) 5,890 5,880

Compression ratio 17.4:1 17:1

14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

Max. power (ps/rpm) 280/2,500 260/2,500

Max. torque (kg.m/RPM) 100/1,400 107/1,250

Injection timing BTDC 12°~ BTDC 0° BTDC 15°

Ignition order 1-5-3-6-2-4 ←

Oil pump type Gear ←

Oil cooler type Water cooled ←

Filter type Felt-paper type ←

Thermostat Wax pellet ←

·Capacity for changing (18ℓ) ·Capacity for changing (11.6ℓ)
Oil capacity
·Capacity after disassembly/assembly (20ℓ) ·Capacity after disassembly/assembly (13.1ℓ)
·Engine assembly (10.6ℓ) ·Engine assembly (10.5ℓ)
Coolant capacity
·Whole vehicle (22ℓ) ·Whole vehicle (27ℓ)
Start motor voltage capacity 24V-6.0kW 24V-4.0kW

Alternator voltage capacity 24V-100A ←

305 cc/rev (loading type)
Air compressor capacity 225 cc/rev.
238 cc/rev (clutch type)

14 - 7
PTO overview

Allowable Reduction ratio Flange

Transmission Rotating
Project PTO type torque Dia. Vehicle
model direction
(kg.m) High Low (mm)

ZF6S1000TO
Reverse from
102 - 0.53 Φ85
engine
ZF6AS1000TO

ZF6S1000TO
Same with
35 - 0.67 Φ90
engine
ZF6AS1000TO

Reverse from
ZF9S1110TO 102 - 0.97 Φ85
engine

Same with
MCV ZF9S1110TO 43 - 1.24 Φ90 Mid Range
engine

Reverse from
T8S6 30 - 0.898 Φ86
engine

Reverse from
T110S6 102 - 0.535 Φ90
engine

Same with
T110S6 35.7 - 0.943 Φ90
engine

14 - 8
 Recommended lubricant

Component Oil Specification Model and capacity Change interval Recommended oil
· DL06K (Doosan) engine · At initial 5,000 km,
Oil change capacity (18ℓ), then at every 40,000/60,000 km
· ACEA-E5
Capacity after disassembly/ (if the daily mileage is within 500
assembly (20ℓ) km, change it every 40,000 km)
· F4AE3681 (IVECO) engine
Engine Oil change capacity (11.6ℓ), · ISU Chemical TOTAL
Engine · ACEA-E3 or ACEA E5 · At every 40,000 km
Oil Capacity after disassembly/ : RUBIA 7400 10W40
assembly (13.1ℓ)

14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

· B5.9 (CUMMINS) engine
Oil change capacity (13ℓ),
· API CH-4, SAE 15W 40 · At every 10,000km
Capacity after disassembly/
assembly (15ℓ)
· ZF6S1000TO
Oil change capacity (9ℓ),
Capacity after disassembly/
· Gear oil: assembly (9.3ℓ) · ISU Chemical TOTAL
· At every 60,000 km or yearly
API GL-4, SAE80W90 · ZF9S1110TO : RUBIA ZS30
· Engine oil: Oil change capacity (8.5ℓ),
API CD/CE/CF/SF/SG Capacity after disassembly/
grade, assembly (8.8ℓ)
SAE30 · T8S6
12.5ℓ(PTO:13.5ℓ) · At initial 5,000 km, and then · ISU Chemical TOTAL
Gear · T110S6 At every 40,000 km : EP80W90
Transmission
Oil 9.5ℓ(PTO:10.5ℓ)
· ZF6AS1000TO
Oil change capacity (9ℓ), · ISU Chemical TOTAL
· API GL-4, SAE80W90 · At every 60,000 km or yearly
Capacity after disassembly/ : EP80W90
assembly (9.3ℓ)
· ISU Chemical TOTAL
· S2500
: DEXRON III
Oil change capacity (13ℓ),
· DEXRON III · At every 40,000km or yearly · LG caltaz
Capacity after disassembly/
: DEXRON III
assembly (15ℓ)
· SK:DEXRON III

14 - 9
 Component Oil Specification Model and capacity Change interval Recommended oil
· At initial 8,000 km, and then every · ISU Chemical TOTAL
· API GL-5 · FAW-S390H(8.5ℓ)
Rear axle Gear oil 40,000 km : Transmission
SAE80W90 · T8H(10ℓ)
or yearly TM 80W90
Power
· If oil is contaminated or when · ISU Chemical TOTAL
Power steering steering · ATF DEXRON II-D · 7.3ℓ
repairing power steering system : FULID II-D
fluid
· Viscosity
Wheel bearing
Grease (NLGI grade) 000,00 · As necessary · At every 5,000 km
and chassis
Grease
· SSK 201 · ISU Chemical TOTAL
Clutch Brake fluid · As necessary · At every 20,000 km or two years
(SAE J1703, DOT3/4) : HBF3
· ISU Chemical TOTAL
· Necessary amount
Coolant Anti-freeze · EDS M-8207 · At every 40,000km : ANTIFREEZE(AL),
(concentration 50%)
NON-BOREX type
Shipping · MIL H-24459 or · ISU Chemical TOTAL
Cab tilt · As necessary · As necessary
oil equivalent : EQUIVIS ZS 15

CAUTION
· The oil change intervals specified above is based on the normal driving condition. If driving in a severe condition, shorten the change interval.
· The oil capacity specified above is dry capacity. Therefore, it may differ from the actual charging amount.
· Use only genuine filters. If using oil other than the recommended one, confirm its specification first.

14 - 10
 MEMO

14 - 11

14. Vehicle Identification and Specifications

MEMO

14 - 12